Home

1 - JeepHowTo.com

1. CHANGE OWNERSHIP NOTIFICATION MODEL REGISTRATION OR LICENSE NUMBER ll lA HE cep NEW OWNER S NAME NEW OWNER S ADDRESS IF RESOLD BY CHRYSLER JEEP DEALERSHIP TELEPHONE NO ENTER DEALER STAMP IN BOX ABOVE SECOND OWNER 80f40753 313 314 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 116 Adding Fuel o ae mm RR 240 Additives Fuel 239 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 274 Air Conditioner Maintenance 275 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 275 Air Conditioning System 186 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 190 AIP FING xu zuo em TES 274 Air Pressure Tires 228 Air Suspension 212 uec enm oes 37 43 Airbag Deployment 44 Airbag Light 42 43 45 54 158 Airbag Maintenance 45 Airbag Side 39 42 43 Airbag Window Side Curtain 39 42 43 Alarm Security Alarm 163 Alarm System Security Alarm 15 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 221 Anti Lock Warning Light 162 Anti Theft System 163 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 296 Appearance Care 286 316 Assist Hill Start 224 Auto Down Power Windows 24 Automatic Dimming Mirror 65 Automatic Door Locks 20 Automatic Head
2. Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse J06 40 Amp Antilock Brakes J15 40 Amp Front Cabin Green Pump Stability Green Fan Blower Control System J17 40 Amp Starter Motor J07 30 Amp Antilock Brakes Green Solenoid Pink Valve Stability J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control System Blue Control Module J08 40 Amp Power Seat Powertrain Totally Integrated Power Module Green Control Module J09 30 Amp E Brake Transmission Cavity Car Mini Description Pink Range tridge Fuse J10 30 Amp Headlamp J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan Fuse Pink Wash Relay Yellow Motor HI J01 40 Amp Air Suspension Contact Radiator Fan Green J11 30 Amp Drive Train Motor Low J02 30 Amp Power Liftgate Pink Control Module J20 30 Amp Front Wiper Pink Module J12 30 Amp Rear Defroster Pink J03 30 Amp Trailer Tow Pink J21 20 Amp Front Rear Pink J13 60 Amp Main Ignition Blue Washer Control J04 25 Amp Driver Door Yellow Off Draw IOD J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module Natural Node J14 20 Amp Trailer Tow Natural Jo5 25 Amp Passenger Blue Lamps Park M1 15 Amp Stop Lamps Natural Door Node Lamps Blue 289 290 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M2 20 Amp Electronic Limit M11 10 Amp
3. 66 Ou lSIGe gases uS Ee a 65 Rearview 65 Vanity 22 42 ae or ooh Sede 67 Mode Fuel Saver suus Rd Rs 171 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 232 MOPAR Accessories 271 Multi Displacement Engine System 220 Multi Function Control Lever 104 New Vehicle Break In Period 53 Occupant Restraints 28 42 44 Occupant Restraints Sedan 39 42 43 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 237 Odometer scs RS 159 JI x bok dede modena o oer do de Rr 159 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 215 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 215 Oil Change Indicator 171 Oil Change Indicator Reset 1 OI ENGINE PN 272 Capacity i iu ode 296 Change Interval 272 DIESEL Lira eant e es 273 DIPSUCK 2x e Barak oda 272 A prine b eges a 274 Identification Logo 272 Materials Added to 274 Recommendation 272 273 296 nir gt nda ak oh a Rh RE i 274 VISCOSILY 00 cose 273 296 Onboard Diagnostic System 271 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors 65 OverdriVe ic a BPR i p onanii 205 Overdrive OFF Switch 205 Overhead Console 137 Overheating Engine 163 254 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 Paint Care ix rs Eae x 286 Pant Da
4. 7 Connect the wiring harness to the fron lamp connector og Rear Tail Stop and Turn Signal Lamps 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the two push pins from the tail lamp housing 294 3 Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel 4 Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from lamp 5 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 6 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the lamp assembly Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the lower trim from the liftgate 3 Once lower trim is loose close the liftgate 4 Open the flipper glass 5 Pull up glass seal at bottom of window opening 6 Remove small trim panel around liftgate glass striker 7 Close flipper glass and raise the liftgate 8 Continue removing the trim 9 Disconnect the two trim panel lights 073310731 Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps 10 Tail lamps are now visible Rotate socket s counter clockwise 11 Remove replace bulb s 12 Reinstall the socket s 13 Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim Rear Fascia Mounted Fog Lamp 1 Using a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver gently pry between the inboard edge of the lamp and the fascia 2 Remove lamp from fascia opening 073335209 Rear Fog Lamps 3 Twist socket counter clockwise 4 Replace bulb 5
5. Continued WARNING Continued Does not predict the lane curvature or the movement of preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes Does not always fully recognize com plex driving conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop WARNING You should switch off the ACC system e When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations i e in highway construc tion zones e When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp when driving on roads that are wind ing icy snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes Continued e When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes e When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury WARNING Continued The Cruise Control system has two contro modes e Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintain ing an appropriate distance between ve hicles e Normal fixed speed cruise control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section NOTE The system will not react to preceding ve hicles Always be aware of the mode se
6. 15 Replacement Parts 271 Replacement Tires 230 Restraints 47 Restraints Occupant 28 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 147 Roll Over Warning 4 Rotation Tires 231 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 54 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 55 Safety Tips sceo e e o 53 Safety Exhaust Gas 28 54 Schedule Maintenance 302 Seat Belt Reminder 36 322 seat Belis 22 aia 29 54 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage us a BD 32 And Pregnant Women 37 Child Restraint 47 51 Front Seat os cama pect neotio 29 Inspection sss ie lo Ee Renee es 54 Maintenance 288 PretensiOners ula ens parce aes 34 Remihd r Ayoma mid Eae S 161 Shoulder Belt Anchorage 32 Untwisting Procedure 32 SOAS mi aks i OA 92 Cleaning 287 Easy EMY pora e RI 103 Head Restraints 97 Heated 95 MEMORY asus Sox idee ged 101 i ise boe d sU 93 94 Rear FOldINO do epulis 99 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 163 Selec Terrain 211 Selection of Oil 273 Sentry Key Immobilizer 14 Sentry Key Programming 15 Sentry Key Replacement 15 Service and Maintenance 302 Service Assistance
7. Exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE but ton is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device CAUTION e Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any supported device anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines Continued 183 CAUTION Continued e Placing items on the iPod or external USB device or connections to the iPod or external USB device in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA usic can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect phone system Controlling BTSA using Radio Buttons To get into the BTSA mode press either AUX
8. Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable delay between cycles desirable At driving speeds above 10 mph 16 km h the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds be tween cycles first detent to a cycle every one second fourth detent 4 Y Intermittent Wiper Operation NOTE If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled 031509578 Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer push on the end of the lever toward the steering wheel and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected 031509581 Windshield Washer Operation If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers neces sar
9. CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will in crease the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is sus pected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as anticipated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can dam age your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accu rate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid f necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 219 MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions
10. WARNING The air suspension system uses a high pres sure volume of air to operate the system To avoid personal injury or damage to the sys tem see your authorized dealer for service Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a mes sage will appear in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information An audible chime will be heard whenever a System error has been detected Operation The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which the system is working to achieve When raising if multiple indicator lamps are flashing on the Up button the highest flashing indica tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve When lowering if multiple indicators 214 are flashing on the Up button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve Pressing the UP button once will move the suspension one position higher from the cur rent position assuming all conditions are met i e engine running speed below threshold etc The UP button can be pressed multiple times each press will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions i e vehicle speed
11. e Display Warnings And Maintenance e Precautions While Driving With e Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode e Forward Collision Warning If Equipped e PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED eParkSense Sensors acces ss erase ee eee e ParkSense Warning Display ParkSense Display coec carana mea en anan e Enabling And Disabling ParkSense e Service The ParkSense Park Assist System Cleaning The ParkSense System 62 64 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the wind shield R Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030434773 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated
12. OWNER REGISTRATION CERTIFICATE Selling Dealer OWNER Stamp ADDRESS Selling Dealer Signature Telephone Number Private Make Business Model have provided and explained the following Day pare Ree Registration No or License No OPERATING MANUAL Vehicle Handbook VEHICLE PRE DELIVERY INSPECTION CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DEALER SIGNATURE TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 ueni 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 57 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL leen hh hn nnn 153 5 STARTING OPERATING 193 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES AAA 253 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE A A or Ma RUN de 265 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ERE 301 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Ade a eel we 303 10 INDEX E ED 315 INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it repre sents precision workmanship distinctive styl ing and high q
13. bo AR 2 PUSH MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S AIR ELECTRONIC INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINTSYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL 150 CONDITIONER STABILITY CONTROL OFF 010533317 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could re sult in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss impor tant information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a plate located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from out side of the vehicle through the windshield This number also is stamped into the right front body behind the right front seat Move the right front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped VIN 010809610 VIN Location 1010834915 0834915 Right Front Body VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in Serious injury or death 10 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This sys
14. 116 upholders 144 ustomer Assistance 306 ata Recorder Event 46 aytime Running Lights 106 efroster Rear Window 149 efroster Windshield 54 189 iagnostic System Onboard 271 iesel Engine Maintenance 302 jese FUSI 2 uu om tendre 239 iesel Fuel Requirements 239 ipsticks Automatic Transmission 285 Oil Engine 272 Power Steering 219 isabled Vehicle Towing 262 Disposal Engine iio sio Rx 274 Door LOCKS 4 dex band Bad 19 Door Locks Automatic 20 DRIVING 24a wales Oe ea Mans 215 Off Pavement 215 2 i ha Ge BA Rex eges 215 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel ECONOMY osse dora Ee E S 171 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 184 Electric Remote Mirrors 66 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 142 Electronic Brake Control System 221 Anti Lock Brake System 221 Brake Assist System 222 Electronic Roll Mitigation 222 Traction Control System 221 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 222 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control ux ee ee ee Bead 114 116 Electronic Stability Control ESC 223 Electronic Vehicle Information Center wt ed denen d Eds 159 163 317 Emergenoy In Case of Hazard Warning Fla
15. 306 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 158 Settings Personal 177 Shift Lever Override 261 dor a ve RSS 203 Automatic Transmission 203 Shoulder Belt 29 Side Airbag 43 Signals Turn 55 159 293 294 SmatBeams 105 Snow Chains Tire Chains 229 Sound Systems 181 Sound Systems Radio 181 Spare Tire 255 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 237 QU dei 273 Speed Control Cruise Control 114 116 5 162 SIMIO i ya Bee ERE Ree ee d 198 Automatic Transmission 198 Cold Weather 200 Engine Fails to Start 200 Starting and Operating 198 Starting Procedures 198 Steering i PPP 218 219 Tilt COlUmm y eme Res 112 113 Wheel Heated o sek mom e 113 Wheel 112 113 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 185 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 185 Storage amp eu deed eG 292 Storage Vehicle 190 292 Storing Your Vehicle 292 SUN ROO Roe deg eevee ete 138 140 Sunglasses Storage 138 Supplemental Restraint System ADAG sos 2 d iwi 37 Suspension Air 212 Sway Control 224 Synthetic
16. e Clean Radar Sensor in the Front of Vehicle If the ACC system deactivates due to perfor mance limiting conditions Refer to Adap tive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped e ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error If the ACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction that limits functional ity Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Ve hicle if equipped e ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sen sor If the ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault that requires service 165 from an authorized dealer Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Coolant low e Service air suspension system e Oil change due e Key in ignition e Lights on e Key in Ignition Lights On e Ignition or Accessory On e Ignition or Accessory On Lights On e Turn signal on e Park assist on e Warning object detected e Memory 1 profile set e Memory 2 profile set e Memory system unavailable Not in Park e Memory system unavailable Seatbelt buckled 166 emory 1 profile recall emory 2 profile recall Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start Wrong Key Damaged Key Key not programmed Function currently unavailable Power Lift gate Unlock to operate Power Liftgate Put in Park to operate Power Liftgate Automatic high be
17. seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passen ger s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compart ment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 37 Advanced Front Airbag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Pas 2 Knee Bolster senger Advanced Front Airbags 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air bag NOTE These airbags are certified to regulations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type o
18. WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri cants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system Some unap proved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs e The air conditioning system contains refrig erant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C Sys tem Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Con ditioners Compressor Oil and Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manu 275 facturer recommends that air conditioning ser vice be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recy cling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPARO Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of
19. when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position allowing you to limit the highest available gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into ERS 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to 2 second or 1 first when needed NOTE e If you pull and hold not tap the shift lever to the left the transmission will down shift to the lowest gear that can be at tained without overrevving the engine The display will show the gear the vehicle is in and will limit the top gear to the one displayed e If you push and hold not tap the shift lever to the right the transmission will exit the gear limiting mode and shift to the appropriate gear The display will read D 3 6L and 3 0L Diesel Engine When in the DRIVE position the first tap to the left will shift down one gear and will display that gear For example if you are in DRIVE and are in fifth gear when you tap the shift lever one time to the left the transmission will down shift to fourth gear and the display will show 4 Another tap to the left will shift the transmis Sion into third gear 5 7L Engine On vehicles equipped with the 5 7L engine use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelera tions This additional gear improves vehicle performance and cooling capability when tow ing a trailer on certain g
20. Continued WARNING Continued e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the bat tery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related acces sories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling CAUTION e Itis essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is at tached to the positive post and the nega tive cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and identified on the battery case Continued CAUTION Continued e Ifa fast charger is used while battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air condi tioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt condition should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air con ditioning system as the chemicals can dam age your air conditioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
21. Front Air Dam Fasteners Quadra Lift If Equipped When off roading it is recommended that the lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle or terrain be selected The vehicle height should then be raised as re quired by the changes in terrain The Selec Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec Terrain switch position The vehicle height can be changed from the default height for each Selec Terrain mode by normal use of the air suspension switches Refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Start ing and Operating for further information When To Use 4WD LOW Range If Equipped When off road driving shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range 215 Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precau tions that must be considered before entering the water NOTE Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to 20 inches 51 cm of water while crossing small rivers or streams To main tain optimal performance of your vehicle s heating and ventilation system it is recom mended to switch the system into recircula tion mode during water for
22. Heating Venti M15 20 Amp Power Seat Yellow Slip Differential Red lation amp Air Yellow Module s Air Suspension Conditioning Adaptive Cruise M3 20 Amp Liftgate Climate Con Control Audio Yellow Headrest trol System Telematics M5 25 Amp 115V AC Power M12 30 Amp Radio Amplifier Daytime Run Natural Inverter Green ning Lights M6 20 Amp Cigar Lighter M13 20 Amp Instrument Relay Air Sus Yellow Yellow Cluster pension M7 20 Amp Power Outlet M14 20 Amp Back Up Cam Module Yellow 2 Switchable Yellow era DEM M8 20 Amp Front Heated Yellow Seat amp Steering M16 10 Amp Occupant Re Wheel Red m Control er idi Eu M M19 25 Amp Automatic M10 15 Amp Video Universal Natural 1 Blue Garage Door Opener M20 15 Amp Instrument Blue Cluster M21 20 Amp Automatic Yellow Shutdown 3 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M22 10 Amp Horns Low M29 10 Amp Tire Pressure M36 20 Amp Power Outlet Red High Right Red Monitor Yellow M23 10 Amp Horns Low M30 15 Amp J1962 Diag M37 10 Amp Antilock Red _ High Left Blue Connector Red Brakes Stability M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper M31 20 Amp Backup Lamps Control System Natural Yellow Module M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump Mo M32 10 Amp Occupant Re
23. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters is de tected outside the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle To Enter The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the button on the right side of the chrome accent bar which is located on the liftgate below the flipper glass to lock or unlock the vehicle 021833019 Liftgate Passive Entry Button NOTE If Unlock All Doors ist Press is pro grammed in EVIC all doors will unlock when you push the button on the liftgate If Un lock Driver Door 1st press is programmed in EVIC the liftgate and Flipper glass will unlock when you press the button on the liftgate For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel To Lock The Vehicle s Doors The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on th
24. Jeep dealer er tongue weight is subject to operating conditions see table below 243 The table below provides a guide to the maximum trailer tongue weights for a given operating condition See Note 2 Up to 3 occupants with luggage 772 lbs 350 kg 4 occupants with luggage 655 lbs 297 kg 5 occupants with luggage 500 lbs 227 kg Note 2 Table provided as a guide only using 150 lbs 68 kg per person plus 15 lbs 7 kg of luggage NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and or Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR listed below GVWR Front GAWR Rear GAWR All Variants 6 501 Ibs 2 949 kg 3 201 lbs 1 452 kg 3 699 lbs 1 678 kg Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 of the weight in the front of the trailer Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch 244 za T 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the front rear axles of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e Th
25. e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch e Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multi stage driver and front passenger airbags This System provides output appropriate to the se verity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deploy ment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the airbag on the instrument panel be cause any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate Continued WARNING Continued Donot put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective cov ers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citi zen band radios etc Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB
26. for maintenance schedules 302 304 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer distributors are vitally inter ested in your satisfaction with their products and services If a servicing problem or other difficulty should occur we recommend that you take the following steps Discuss the problem at the authorized dealer with the dealer principal or the service man ager Management personnel at the authorized dealer are in the best position to resolve the problem quickly When you contact the distributor please provide all of the following information e Your name address and phone number e Vehicle Identification Number this 17 digit number is found on an etched plate or label located on the left front corner of the instru ment panel visible through the windshield It is also available from your vehicle registra tion or title e Selling and servicing authorized dealer e Vehicle s delivery date and current odometer distance 306 e Service history of your vehicle e An accurate description of the problem and the conditions under which it occurs ARGENTINA Chrysler Argentina S A Boulevard Azucena Villaflor 435 C1107CII Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 54 11 4891 7900 Fax 54 11 4891 7901 AUSTRALIA Chrysler Chrysler Australia Pty Ltd ACN 124 956 505 PO Box 4145 Dandenong South Vic 3175 Ph 03 9238 2600 AUSTRIA Chrysler Austria Gesellschaft m b H Felmayergasse 2 A 1210 Wien Tel
27. ously manufactured The Owner s Manual illustrates and describes the features that are standard or available as extra cost options Therefore some of the equipment and accessories in this publication may not appear on your vehicle NOTE Be sure to read the Owner s Manual first before driving your vehicle and before at taching or installing parts accessories or making other modifications to the vehicle In view of the many replacement parts and accessories from various manufacturers avail able on the market the manufacturer cannot be certain that the driving safety of your vehicle will not be impaired by the attachment or instal lation of such parts Even if such parts are officially approved for example by a general operating permit for the part or by constructing the part in an officially approved design or if 5 an individual operating permit was issued for the vehicle after the attachment or installation of such parts it cannot be implicitly assumed that the driving safety of your vehicle is unim paired Therefore neither experts nor official agencies are liable Therefore the manufacturer only assumes responsibility when parts which are expressly authorized or recommended by the manufacturer are attached or installed at an authorized dealer The same applies when modifications to the original condition are sub sequently made on the manufacturers ve hicles Your warranties do not cover any part that
28. 051810685 Transfer Case Switch NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature protec tion condition exists a For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low message will flash from the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Re fer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 4WD LOW to 4WD HI With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and press the 4WD LOW button once on the transfer case switch The 4WD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete NOTE e f shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature pro tection condition exists a For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center 209 EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is pos sible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be re quired for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The
29. 204 WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating and Towing a Dis abled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information DRIVE This range should be selected only when the vehicle is at a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied The transmission automati cally upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the shift lever left or right
30. Cargo Area Cover 147 Cargo Area Features 146 Cargo Compartment 146 HNE yea sehe Sat a yey ELE 146 Cargo ac dee a a 146 Cargo Tie Downs 148 Cellular Phone 72 186 Center High Mounted Stop Light 295 Chains TIO seo coer we eR 229 Changing A Flat Tire 255 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 53 Checks Safety 53 Child Restraint 47 49 51 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 49 Child Safety Locks 21 Clean Air Gasoline 238 Climate 186 Cold Weather Operation 200 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 186 COMPASS 4 42 bata OR Ea 174 Compass Calibration 175 Compass Variance 175 Computer Trip Travel 172 Connector AA SO 181 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 181 Conserving Fuel 171 Console Overhead 137 Cooling System 279 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 280 Coolant Capacity 296 C C C D D D D Coolant Level 281 Disposal of Used Coolant 281 Drain Flush and Refill 279 Inspection ius eres 279 Points to Remember 281 Pressure Cap 280 Radiator Cap 280 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 279 296 ruise Control Speed Control
31. Distance Setting 3 ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 2 CIAO a E mi Y Distance Setting 2 032435549 032435495 ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 1 56789 mi RE 032435548 Distance Setting 1 To change the distance setting press the Dis tance button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting adjusts be tween long medium and short If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indicator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting re gardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until e The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 24 km h and the system automati cally disengages itself e The distance setting is changed e The system disengages Refer to the infor mation on ACC Activation The maximum braking applied by ACC is lim ited however the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set
32. Do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Continued 53 WARNING Continued e Itis extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you uncon Scious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area 54 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO N
33. The System is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage 220 _ o sozted Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill itis important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmiss
34. The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system moni tors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE e The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones e The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adja cent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the 67 BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc 030409806 Sensor Location Driver Side Shown The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors 68 030435088 Warning Light Location The BSM system can also be configured
35. Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Detected Detected Detected Detected Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow Flashing 2 Slow Flashing 1 Slow Flashing Continuous Radio Mute No Yes Yes Yes Yes NOTE ParkSense will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with a switch located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or through the Customer Programmable Features section of the EVIC The available choices are OFF Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the ParkSense9 switch is P pressed to disable the system the OFF instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE or to DRIVE at or below 11 mph 18 km h and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK AS SIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE or for five seconds when the vehicle is in DRIVE The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or defective The Park Sense switch LED will be OFF when t
36. Weather procedures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up Normal Starting Diesel Engine Observe the following when the engine is op erating e All message center lights are off e Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is off Low Oil Pressure Light is off Cold Weather Precautions Operation in ambient temperature below 32 F 0 may require special considerations The following chart suggests these options No 2 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel 7 C aor ar Diesel wc OF 2 Ultra Low Sulfur 23 C ao Climatized Diesel Fuel ____________ No 1 Ultra Low 29 C E e E E Sulfur Diesel Fuel 81949058 No 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel ULSD should only be used where extended arctic conditions 10 F 23 C exist NOTE e Use of Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel or Number 1 ULSD Diesel Fuel results in a noticea
37. and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system Brake Limited Differential BLD functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the sys 221 tem will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if ESC system is in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further infor mation Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS comple ments the anti lock brake system ABS Apply ing the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the System you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated 222 WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the
38. appropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability e Connecting an iPod or consumer elec tronic audio device to the AUX port lo cated in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB AUX connector port which is located in the center console or glove compartment 044036451 Center Console USB AUX Connector Port Once the audio device is connected and syn chronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 con trol system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the iPod USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level 181 Using This Feature By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to USB port e The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play B
39. battery 292 e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure ad equate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the System is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type Glove Box Lamp 194 Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976 Rear Cargo Lamp 214 2 Visor Vanity Lamp V26377 Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906 Instrument Cluster General Illumination 103 Telltale Hazard Lamp 74 Exterior Lights Bulb Type Rear Turn Signal Lamps 7440NA WY21W Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps W3W Front Park Turn Lamp T20 Front FogLamps PSX24W Front Side Marker W5W Headlamps Low Beam High Intensity Discharge HID 015 Serviced at Authorized Dealer Daytime Running Lamp DRL 3157K Headlamps Low Beam H11 Headlamps High Beam 9005 Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 W16W Rear License Lamps WSW Rear Stop Tail Lamps 3157 P27 7W Rear FogLamps 7440 W21W NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authori
40. close attempt will be a Manual Close move ment with Pinch Protect disabled Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually How ever the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sun roof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the per ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffet ing If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 139 Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches remain active for up approximately ten minutes after the ignition Switch has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature COMMAND VIEW SUNROO
41. e Italian 0800 80 29 22 Telefax 41 0 44 755 64 00 TAIWAN Chrysler Taiwan Co LTD 13th Floor Union Enterprise Plaza 1109 Min Sheng East Road Section 3 Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 080081581 Fax 886225471871 TURKEY Chrysler Jeep Tic A S TEM Otoyolu Hadimkoy Cikisi 34900 Buyukcekmece Istanbul Tel 90 212 867 40 00 Fax 90 212 867 44 63 UKRAINE JSC AutoCapital Velyka Vasylkivska str 15 01004 Kyiv Tel 38 044 206 8888 Fax 438 044 206 8889 UNITED KINGDOM Chrysler UK Ltd Tongwell Milton Keynes MK15 8BA Tel 01908 301090 Fax 01908 301203 URUGUAY Malunix S A Miguelete 2276 Montevideo Uruguay Tel 598 2 401 7818 Fax 598 2 402 2666 VENEZUELA Chrysler de Venezuela LLC Avenida Pancho Pepe Croquer Zona Industrial Norte Valencia Estado Caraboro Tel 58 241 613 2400 Fax 58 241 613 2538 Fax 58 241 6132602 58 241 6132438 PO BOX 1960 Services And Parts Zona Industrial 11 Av Norte Sur 5 C C Calle Este Oeste C C LD Center Local B 2 Valencia Estado Carabobo Telf 58 241 6132757 58 241 6132773 Fax 58 241 6132743 311 CHANGE OWNERSHIP NOTIFICATION MODEL REGISTRATION OR LICENSE NUMBER ll lA HE cep NEW OWNER S NAME NEW OWNER S ADDRESS IF RESOLD BY CHRYSLER JEEP DEALERSHIP TELEPHONE NO ENTER DEALER STAMP IN BOX ABOVE FIRST OWNER 80f40712 312
42. ing suspension and exhaust system for damage Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain com ponents steering and suspension Re tighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual 217 e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts e After extended operation in mud sand wa ter or similar dirty conditions have the ra diator fan brake rotors wheels brake lin ings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e f you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Im pacted material can cause a wheel imbal ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation 218 POWER STEERING 3 6L Engine and 3 0L Diesel Engine Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of ma
43. local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death 90 When you press the Voice Command button you will hear beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command c VR button listen for the beep and say your com mand Pressing the Voice Command button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Can cel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active applica tion When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Command button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system u
44. long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean some thing is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymna sium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation con tinues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufac turer s instructions for cleaning Do
45. n n This light indicates water has col a 4 lected in the fuel filter and should 4 be drained immediately See your authorized dealer for service e Air Suspension Up The air suspension up telltale will illuminate when the air suspension is in use For further information refer to Starting And Operating e Air Suspension Down The air suspension down telltale will illuminate when the air suspen Sion is in use For further informa tion refer to Starting And Operat ing e Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approxi mately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added e Loose Gascap Indicator If the vehicle diagnostic system p determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indica tor will display in the telltale display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator ne This light will turn on to indicate the 9 windshield washer fluid is low e SERV 4WD The SERV 4WD light monitors the SERV electric shift 4WD system If the 4WD SERV 4WD light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is
46. or tem peratures above 150 F 65 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches e If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manu ally e If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear the liftgate will continue to power close However ve hicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle Continued 28 WARNING Continued e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with temperature it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenger e Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR l
47. tings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protection fea tures for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions e Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing System will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperature is greater than 32 F 0 e Transmission In NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmis sion is in the NEUTRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering col umn upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Control Handle To unlock the steering column push the control handle downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel up ward or downward as desired To lengthen or Shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To ock the steering column in position push the control handle upward
48. to assure the fluids have not been contaminated Contami nated fluid milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage Driving In Snow Mud And Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to AWD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Oper ating for further information Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the trans mission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift into RE VERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls you
49. uu cy Bed SOD ee 24 POWER seen 24 Windshield Defroster 54 Windshield Washers 110 bens set deed ea 277 Windshield Wiper Blades 276 Windshield Wipers 110 Wipers Intermittent 111 Wipers Rain Sensitive 112
50. 20 preset messages To send a message press the button while the system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to E ist of Preset Messages 1 Yes 2 No 3 Where are you 4 need more direction 5 6 Why 7 8 love you Call me 9 Call me later 10 Thanks 11 See You in 15 minutes 12 am on my way 3 I ll be late 4 Are you there yet 15 Where are we meeting 16 Can this wait 17 Bye for now 8 When can we meet 9 Send number to call 20 Start without me Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming messages e Press the button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Incoming Message An nouncement you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose con nection to the Uconnect M Phone When this happens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 85 86 See Setup Voice Tree Main Me
51. CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previ 185 ous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thin ner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 186 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a par ticular disc it may be damaged scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain co
52. CONDITIONS 06 M m ps Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost Sg Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear COLD DRY CONDITIONS gii Set the Mode control to Floor A If it s sunny you may want more upper air In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 74 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost S as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 81352266 191 192 194 e 5 7E Engine 219 e Power Steering Fluid Check 219 e MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED CHARLES chime ta con ee PE 220 APARKINCIBRAK E ieee aes 220 e ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 221 e Anti Lock Brake System ABS 221 e Traction Control System TCS 221 e Brake Assist System BAS 222 e Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 222 e Electronic Stability Control ESC 223 e Trailer Sway Control TSC 224 esHilliStart AssIist HSA T 224 e Ready Alert Braking 226 Rain Brake SUpport a o 226 Hill Descent Control Four Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two Speed Transfer Case Only 226 e ESC A
53. Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authori ties to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals and children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open con tainers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze reeze point or replacing engine coolant anti reeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the fron
54. Dipstick 8 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir 269 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 0L DIESEL 070710761 5 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 1 Engine Oil Dipstick 2 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 270 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This System monitors the performance of the emis Sions engine and automatic transmission con trol systems When these systems are operat ing properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current govern ment regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnos tic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for Service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission con trol system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed e f the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic c
55. Door Locks If Equipped If this feature is selected your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and all doors are closed This feature will reset whenever a door is opened This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature If Equipped If Auto Unlock is enabled this feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small chil dren riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock sys tem To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK posi tion 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door 021806189 Y Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a colli sion Remember that the rear doors can only be opened fro
56. Fluid Capacities 296 Fluid Leaks 5 229 xs 55 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 284 285 Bros uses o SHAR ee S 282 ENQINC Ol c i 4 ate d hte B 272 Power Steering 219 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 297 Fog Light Service 293 FogiLights x sue kk Ree 107 159 293 Fog Lights Rear ss Rs 163 Folding Rear Seat 99 Four Wheel Drive 208 211 Operation xcd enge 208 SYSIGMS 2 bs Paene Pp er 208 Four Wheel Drive Operation 208 Four Way Hazard Flasher 254 Front Axle Differentia 283 Front Heated Seats 95 PUGH va WE xS 237 Additives ans urs dcin dos ges eR 239 Conserving 171 Diesel kor eas umo Eom Rs 239 Filler Cap Gas Cap 240 241 Gasoline 237 Gauge 4 5 6 maius iae mins k di 162 oj tits rs a e 169 Octane Rating 237 Requirements 296 Saver Mode 171 Tank Capacity 296 Fuel Optimizer 171 Fuel Saver 171 Fuel System Caution 240 al d 288 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 240 241 271 Heated Seats 95 JackLocation 255 Gasoline Fuel 237 High Beam Indicator 159 Jack Operation 255 256 Conserving 171 Hill Descent C
57. Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The Supple mental Seat Mounted Side Airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats pp 022610242 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label When the airbag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each airbag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left airbag only and a right side impact deploys only the right airbag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC airbags may offer side impact and ve hicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that pro vided by the body structure Each airbag fea tures inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce 39 the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy downward covering both win dows on the impact side 022635074 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pre tensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment 40 e Being too close to the SAB and SABIC airbags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed The
58. System Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON RUN position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter pull on the front driver or passenger door handle refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information with a valid key fob in range or press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle or insert a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch if the Start Stop button is re moved and rotate it to the ON RUN position The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to pro tect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected th
59. To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until check mark appears next to the feature show ing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system 179 has been deactivated Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Wiper Mode If Equipped When this feature is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the System has been deactivated When this fea ture is deactivated the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Hill Start Assist HSA When this feature is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the System has been deactivated 180 Blind Spot Alert There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once the Blind Spot Alert fea ture can be activated in Blind Spot Lights Only
60. a factor the driver should examine the sensor lt may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille To keep the ACC System operating properly it is important to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens e Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system mal function or failure and require a sensor re alignment e f the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service e Do not attach or install any accessories near he sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it 123 NOTE e If the Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message occurs frequently e g more than once on every trip without any snow rain mud or other obstruction have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer Installing a snow plow front end protec tor an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC opera tion Removing ACC Sensor For Off Roading
61. above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from ap proximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle The six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia bumper monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 47 in 120 cm from the front fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the Instrument clusters EVIC display It pro vides both visual and audible warnings to indi cate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and or front
62. active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the button while a call is in progress and make second phone call as described under Mak ing a Second Call While Current Call in Prog ress After the second call has established press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the we button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial The Uconnect Phone will call the last num ber that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progressi
63. and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Therefore do not add any fluid additives to the transmis Sion The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis sion as the chemicals can damage your trans mission components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check 3 6L and 3 0L Diesel Engine Regular fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted f you notice fluid loss or transmission malfunc tion have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will re sult more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information e The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not requi
64. and rear crossbars approximately 24 in 61 cm apart Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft using incre ments of 1 in 2 5 cm If the rear crossbar or any metallic ob ject is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experi ence interruption of satellite radio recep tion For improved satellite radio recep tion avoid placing the rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna e The grab handles on the back of the vehicle if equipped are not to be used as a towing feature CAUTION e To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle do not carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars installed The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on the roof If itis necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lbs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately CAUTION Continued e Long loads which extend over the wind shield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces d
65. armrest and attach the tether hook to the strap located on the front of the arm rest gt 022633126 Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached 52 For center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the outboard seats For the out board seating positions route the tether under the head rests and attach the hook to the top tether anchor located on the back of the seat To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will expose the top tether strap anchorages 022635075 Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Top Tether Strap Anchorage Located on Seatback 022635076 Top Tether Strap Mounting WARNING e An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load floor Improper usage of the tether can lead to a failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passen ger during panic braking or in an accide
66. at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as pos sible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indica tor Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 227 The ESC OFF Indicator Light in t dicates the Electronic Stability ee Control ESC is off OFF TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Safety WARNING e Improperly infla
67. bold face and are underlined 030605582 Voice Commands Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s zero download pager beeper one Dutch Nederlands pair a phone two edit phone pairing pairing three emergency phonebook phonebook four English previous five delete all erase all redial Six Espanol select phone select seven Francais send eight German Deutsch set up phone settings or nine help phone set up asterisk star home transfer call plus Italian Italiano Uconnect M Tutorial hash language try again all all of them list names voice training system training Breakdown service list phones Work call main menu return to main menu yes cancel mobile confirmation prompts confirmation mute on continue mute off delete new entry dial no 89 VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation This Voice Command system al lows you to control your AM FM VR radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following
68. can be used to open the liftgate The emer gency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the lift gate trim panel WARNING During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away NOTE e If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets suffi cient resistance There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position The power liftgate must be in the full open position for rear liftgate close button or overhead console close button to oper ate If the liftgate is not fully open press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the liftgate and then press it again to close If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is opening the liftgate mo tor will disengage to allow manual opera tion The power liftgate buttons will not oper ate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h 27 e The power liftgate will not operate in tem peratures below 22 F 30
69. cannot send phonebook en tries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the Uconnect Phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owners Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries Editing names in the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the we button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone num ber for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe
70. change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the SELECT button to display the current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Trip Info displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Trip functions displays in the EVIC e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following information Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the ast reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position To Reset The Display Reset will
71. child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible Check belt fit periodically A child s squirm ing or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoul der belt under an arm or behind their back ISOFIX Child Seat Anchorage System WARNING Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no cir cumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called ISO FIX The ISOFIX system provides for the instal lation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts i
72. cuts and tight ness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating tempera ture but not running check the cooling sys tem pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOL ANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to re move all deposits and chemicals Properly dis pose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended en gine coolant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lu bricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 279 CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with t
73. driver action is required Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Tow ing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 6 a
74. engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook or the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection Non ACEA Categories For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the require ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Pe troleum Institute API The manu facturer only rec ommends Cer tified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Selection ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oi Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils that meet the requirements of ACEA C3 and that are approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil im proves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom mended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine
75. etc Pressing the DOWN button once will move the suspension one position lower from the current level assuming all conditions are met i e engine running doors closed speed be low threshold etc The DOWN button can be pressed multiple times Each press will lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum of Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current conditions i e ve hicle speed etc Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height The indicator lamps and EVIC messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes e Off Road 2 OR2 Indicator lamps 4 5 and will be illuminated when the vehicle is in R2 ff Road 1 OR1 Indicator lamps 4 and 5 be illuminated when the vehicle is in R1 ormal Ride Height NRH Indicator lamp 4 be illuminated when the vehicle is in this position z oso oo e Park Mode Indicator lamp 3 will be illumi nated when the vehicle is in Park Mode If Park Mode is requested while vehicle speed is between 15 mph 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h indicator lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the vehicle to reduce speed If vehicle speed is reduced to and kept below 15 mph 24 km h indicator lamp 4 will turn off and indicator lamp 3 will flash until Park Mode is achieved at which point indicator lamp 3 will go solid If duri
76. even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat 95 CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could dam age the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Re mote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Front Heated Seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instru ment panel below the climate controls You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF 96 Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the Switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heat ing elements OFF al NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat wi
77. for attach ment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap First loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint There are three top tether anchorages located on the back of the seat behind the gap panel They are not visible until you fold the gap panel down Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the floor behind the seat Finally tighten both straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the ISOFIX anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufactur er s directions exactly when installing an in fant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching lat
78. from being adjusted to re move slack Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis chest and shoulders as appli cable wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided e Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible consistent with comfort to pro vide the protection for which they have been designed A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer Continued 29 WARNING Continued Care should be taken to avoid contamina tion of the webbing with polishes oils and chemicals and particularly battery acid Cleaning may be safely carried out using mild soap and water The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed con taminated or damaged e It is essential to replace the entire assem bly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious e Belts should not be worn with straps twisted e Each belt assembly must only be used by one occupant it is dangerous to put a belt around a child being carried on the occu pant s lap Continued 30 WARNING Continued e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is danger ous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident the best Wearing your belt in th
79. fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode 208 When additional traction is required the 4WD LOW position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI position at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully en gaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle S
80. held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a de crease of 1 mph 2 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed 115 NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system main tains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant Speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 116 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major road ways However it is not a safety system and not
81. in loss of control collision with other vehicles or objects going off the road or overturning any of which may lead to serious injury or death Also failure to use seat belts subjects the driver and passen gers to a greater risk of injury or death To keep your vehicle running at its best have your vehicle serviced at recommended inter vals by an authorized dealer or distributor who has the qualified personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally interested in your complete satisfaction with this vehicle If you encounter a service or warranty problem which is not resolved to your satisfaction discuss the matter with your autho rized dealer or distributors management Your authorized dealer or distributor will be happy to assist you with any questions about your vehicle ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Fa
82. in the igni tion switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the Key Fob cannot be removed until you obtain ser vice e The power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information CAUTION e If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead your Key Fob will become locked in the ignition Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this condition damage could occur to the Key Fob or ignition module Only remove the emergency key for locking and unlocking the doors e Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either e Jump Start the vehicle Charge the battery e Contact your dealer for assistance on how to remove the Key Fob using the manual over ride method 13 WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured Do not leave the Key Fob in the ignition or Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power
83. instrument panel next to the steering wheel The headlight switch controls the opera tion of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and fog lights if equipped 031433930 Headlight Switch To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight switch clockwise When the headlight switch is on the parking lights taillights li cense plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on To turn off the headlights rotate the headlight Switch back to the O Off position NOTE e Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light if equipped lenses that are lighter and less suscep tible to stone breakage than glass lights NM Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning pro cedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaning components Solvents steel wool or other abrasive materi als to clean the lenses Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch to the A AUTO position When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for u
84. is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats If Equipped Some models may be equipped with a power driver seat The power seat switches are lo cated on the outboard side of the seat There are two switches that control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback Power Seat Switches 1 Seatback Control 2 Seat Control Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rear ward the seat will move in the direction of the Switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or backward Push the seatback switch forward or rearw
85. kPa or BAR 34 34 81971362 TIRE 35 PSI If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still ex ists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer be illumi nated the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driv ing next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 236 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The TPM Telltale Light will also flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message when a system fault is detected pos sibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates the pressure values are still being received from the TPM Sensors However the system still needs to be serviced as long as the SER VICE TPM SYSTEM message exists NOTE There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure I
86. less than one second and release and the shade will automatically close then stop This is called Express Shade Close If the sunroof is not at the closed position and the shade is rearward of the middle position the shade will move to the middle position then stop If the sunroof is not at the closed position and the shade is at the middle position the sunroof will automati cally move to the fully closed position before the shade begins Express Shade Close opera tion During Express Shade Close operation any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the shade Sunroof and Power Shade Movement Manual If any sunroof or shade switch is pressed and held for more than one second the sunroof or shade movement will continue only as long as the switch is continuously held Whenever the Switch is released any sunroof or shade move ment will stop This allows the sunroof or shade to be stopped at any desired partially open position Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof or the shade during any close operation If an obstruction is detected the sunroof or shade will automatically reverse direction to release the obstruction If this oc curs remove the obstruction and then press the sunroof or shade switch forward to com plete the desired close motion Pinch Protect Override Method 1 If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing of the
87. lose forward motion or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down f the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4WD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle Speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steer
88. maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or re moval of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation 286 e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or re moval of paint and decals Special Care e f you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off th
89. may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit fea ture NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entrie
90. meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline with a minimum re search octane rating of 91 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 5 7L Engine Theses engines are designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 91 to 95 The manufacturer recom mends the use of 95 octane for optimum per formance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the Worldwide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufac 237 turer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available Besides
91. mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors By pressing and releasing the SELECT button a second time Blind Spot Lights CHM mode is activated In this mode the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Blind Spot Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deactivated NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is mis aligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification Forward Collision Warning The Forward Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This allows for a more dynamic driving experi ence To change FCW status press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature sh
92. no longer be displayed on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for fur ther information CU _ EU 051810686 Neutral Switch NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL N turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash 9 Shift the transmission into PARK 4 Release the brake pedal 4 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle 4 Press and hold the brake pedal 4 0 1 12 Start the engine 3 4 Release the parking brake 15 Shift the transmission into DRIVE release the brake pedal and check that the vehicle operates normally 16 The Keyless Enter N Go button if equipped may now be reinstalled if desired Refer to Starting Procedures Keyless Enter N Go in Starting and Operating for further information 251 NOTE Steps 1 through 7 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEU TRAL N button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer met during the shift the 252 NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator light
93. not en gage until the transmission fluid and en gine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Manually shifting using the ERS shift control between 4 direct gear and 5 D Overdrive gear positions will dem onstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive For ve hicles with 5 7L engines which have two Overdrive gears the transmission may not shift into the top Overdrive gear nor mal fifth gear until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm If the vehicle has not been driven in sev eral days the first few seconds of opera tion after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This con dition is normal and will not cause dam age to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine 207 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Quadra Trac lle Operating Instructions Precautions The Quadra Trac 11 transfer case is fully auto matic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode The Quadra Trac 11 transfer case provides three mode positions 051810685 Transfer Case Switch 4WD HI NEUTRAL 4WD LOW This transfer case is
94. not language specific and usable across all languages For command translations and alternate com mands in supported languages refer to Com mand Translations Emergency Assistance If Equipped If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the we button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number 79 NOTE e The default number is 112 The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area e If supported this number may be pro grammable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully mak ing a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emergency your mobile phone must be e turned on e paired to the Uconnect System e and have network coverage Breakdown Service If Equipped f you need Breakdown service e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Breakdown service 80 NOTE T
95. of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone e Depending on the maximum number of en tries downloaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names 75 can be used Until then if available the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use e Only the phonebook of the currently con nected mobile phone is accessible e Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the mobile phonebook e This downloaded phonebook cannot be ed ited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone also allows the user to download entries one at a time from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept a single phonebook entry from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Ex change Profile OBEX Please see your phone 76 Owners Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones
96. oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Engine Oil Viscosity 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil im proves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom mended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil Diesel Engine Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 11106 and that are approved to Mercedes Benz MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 and ACEA C3 Engine Oil Viscosity CAUTION Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced technology Diesel Engine and an emission device designed to limit Diesel Particulate Emissions from being released into the atmo sphere The durability of your engine and life expectancy of this diesel particulate filter emission device is highly dependent on the use of the correct engine oil SAE 5W 30 Synthetic Low Ash Engine Oil is recommended for all operating temperatures Thi
97. on the overhead console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn these lights on Press a second time to turn the lights off 031433150 Courtesy Reading Lights The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is opened when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer wheel is moved up to the dome ON position 138 Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sun glasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close E A d n d EM Geum Sunglass Storage POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 033333448 5 Eam 034134074 Power Sunroof Switch WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants par ticularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while op erating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued e Ina collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly se cured
98. on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the or external USB device e Turning it clockwise forward and coun terclockwise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE con rol knob fas aster During updating the During all Lis get to the In List mode will scroll through the list fast scroll a slight delay in information on the radio dis play may be noticeable modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the rack is at the bottom of the list just turn he wheel backwards counter clockwise rack faster the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device e Preset 1 e Preset 2 e Preset 3 e Preset 4 e Preset 5 e Preset 6 Playlists Artists Albums Genres Audiobooks Podcasts Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on in that list on the top line and the first item the second line
99. only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the SE LECT button once to clear the resettable func tion being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and hold the SELECT button or two seconds Current display will rese along with other functions Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button unti Units displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units o measure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button unti a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the avail able information displays then press SELECT to display anyone of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans Temperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the hours of engine operation Tire PSI Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Tire PSI displays highlighted in th
100. shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of Security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be pro grammed to any other vehicle CAUTION e Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehic
101. system includes side impact sensors ad jacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags and SABIC air bags during impacts that require side airbag occupant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Cur tain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any ob structions e Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely af fected and or objects could be pushed into causing serious injury Continued WARNING Continued e f your vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent at tachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag provides enhanced protection and works to gether with the Driver Advanced Front Airbag during a frontal impact Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occupants for the b
102. the manufacturer did not supply Nor do they cover the cost of any repairs or adjustments that might be caused or needed because of the installation or use of non manufacturer parts components equipment materials or addi tives Nor do your warranties cover the costs of repairing damage or conditions caused by any changes to your vehicle that do not comply with the manufacturers specifications Original Mopar parts and accessories and other products approved by the manufacturer including qualified advice are available at your authorized dealer When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satis faction Copyright O 2010 Chrysler International HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you de sire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all sub jects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual y Wav d I 0 2 Y n E BAS 1 z ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL Lad WINDSHIELD EU
103. the auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto Up If this hap pens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the window manu ally WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Resetting The Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Button The Window Lockout button on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the rear doors To disable the window con trols on the rear doors press the Window Lockout button To enable the window controls press the Window Lockout button again 021935084 Window Lockout Button Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the per ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially 25 open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the
104. the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehi cle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer con trol up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odometer radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its farthest position up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day 108 031433932 Dimmer Control Lights On Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the drivers door is opened Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome ON position for 10 min utes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will auto
105. to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident e Towing any trailer will increase your stop ping distance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when tow ing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the TOW HAUL mode if equipped or a lower gear range should be selected NOTE Using the TOW HAUL mode if equipped or selecting a lower gear range using the Elec tronic Range Select ERS feature while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the transmission fluid level before towing 5 7L engine To avoid transmission overheating when towing a maximum loaded trailer up steep hills at low speeds 20 mph 32 km h or below holding your vehicle in first gear using
106. too e Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the Switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the Switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automati cally retract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth
107. up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that set ting has been selected Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for O 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SE LECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Display Fuel Saver If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT but ton until ON or OFF appears Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Auto High Beams Available with SmartBeam Only When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions
108. using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected When backing up it is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkSense Park Assist System Always check carefully be hind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are respon sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued 135 WARNING Continued e Before using the ParkSense Park Assist System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to ve hicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the Park View Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the
109. vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer con dition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel po sition e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel po sition The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little thrott
110. wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable the vehicle may be towed in the forward direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information CAUTION e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing e Failure to follow these towing methods could result in damage to the transmission and or transfer case Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited War ranty 263 264 266 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 8 074410741 6 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 8 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir 1 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 268 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 1 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Air Cleaner Filter 071410750 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil
111. will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 2 Recirculation Control Button Press and release to change the current set ting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display This display shows the temperature setting for the left front seat occupant 4 Mode Display This display shows the current Mode selection Panel Bi Level Floor Mix 5 Blower Control Display This display shows the current Blower speed selection 6 Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display This display shows the temperature setting for the right front seat occupant 7 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current set ting the indicator illuminates when ON Per forming this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower will en gage immediately if the Defrost mode is se lected 8 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent tem perature control Push the button for warmer temperature settings 9 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent tem perature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings 10 Auto Temperature Control Button Controls airflow temperature distribution vol ume and the amount of air recirculation auto matically Press and release to select Refer to Automatic Operation for more information Performing this function will cause the ATC to sw
112. windows other controls or move the vehicle e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position With the Keyless Enter N Go feature opening the drivers door when the vehicle s ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON RUN engine stopped will cause the reminder chime to sound Refer to Starting Procedures in Start ing And Operating for further information SENTRY The Sentry Key9 Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will
113. your vehicle s tire placard unless explicitly instructed to do so by the vehicle manufacturer reference tire chain information in this manual Using an under sized tire could result in tire over loading and failure e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sud den tire failure and loss of vehicle control Continued WARNING Continued e Overloading your tires is dangerous Like under inflation overloading can cause tire failure Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle never overload them CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings This can also affect ve hicle performance and can do potential dam age to the driveline Check with your dealer before replacing tires with a different size Directional Tread Pattern Tires If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with tires using a directional tread pattern These tires are designed to optimize dry handling as well as wet performance To obtain the full benefits of this design the tires must be installed so that they rotate in the correct direction The rotation direction of this type of tire is indicated by arrows on the side wall of the tire The full size spare tire is mounted as a direct replacement for the right side of the vehicle For a flat tire on the left side of the vehicle the full siz
114. 17 kow F el sem es 169 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 158 Map Reading 108 mk ee Ga ae 108 138 Rear fog ii dod aah RR S 163 320 Rear Servicing 294 Rear iu s Rs 294 Seat Belt Reminder 161 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 163 SEVICE a a BOR XO RS 293 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 158 Side Marker 294 SmartBeams 105 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 160 Tow Haul Indicator 159 Traction Control 227 Turn Signal 55 104 293 294 Vanity MIMTOF a oe Rm 67 LOCKS Lua Rd Bae dux ere 19 Child Protection 21 DOOF PP 19 Power Door 20 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH ax ede o bag SORS 49 Lubrication Body 276 Maintenance Free Battery 274 Maintenance Procedures 271 Maintenance Schedule 302 Diesel 302 alfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 158 emory Feature Memory Seat 101 emory Seat llis 101 emory Seats and Radio 101 ethanol auam cr e x Rx 238 ethanol Fuel os su eo 238 ini Trip Computer 172 A hee aes Reig ei Red 65 Compass Temperatue 65 Electric Powered 66 Electric REMOTE ue sume 66 Exterior Foldirid uus kh 66 Heated
115. 180 degrees to create a fold that begins imme diately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the Slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to posi tion the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that Serves you best LS Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the button verify the shoul der belt anchorage is latched by pulling down ward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor age is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt an chorage to be adjusted in the upward posi tion without pushing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in
116. 43 1 5465 15131 Fax 43 1 5465 15132 BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN Interamericana Trading Company Warrens St Michael Barbados West Indies Tel 246 417 8000 Fax 246 425 2888 BELGIUM Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg NV Tollaan 68 B 1200 Brussel Tel 0800 94634 free phone number 32 0 2 717 3301 BOLIVIA Ovando amp Cia S A Av Cristobal de Mendoza 2do Anillo y Canal Isuto Santa Cruz Bolivia Tel 591 3 336 3100 Fax 591 3 334 0229 BRAZIL Chrysler do Brasil Av Alfred Jurzykowski 562 09680 900 S o Bernardo do Campo S P Tel 55 11 4173 6611 Fax 55 11 4173 9200 BULGARIA BALKAN STAR Resbarska Str 5 1510 Sofia Tel 359 2 91988 Fax 359 2 945 40 14 CHILE Comercial Chrysler S A Av Americo Vespucio 1601 Quilicura Santiago Chile Tel 56 2 620 7600 Fax 56 2 730 6201 CHINA Chrysler Group China Sales Limited 16F Gemdale Plaza Tower A No 91 Jian Guo Road Chaoyang District Beijing 100022 P R China Chrysler Brand Tel 400 650 1195 Dodge Brand Tel 400 650 0118 COLOMBIA Chrysler Colombia S A Avenida Calle 26 70A 25 Bogot Colombia Tel 57 1 4236700 Fax 57 1 410 5667 COSTA RICA AutoStar La Uruca frente al Banco Nacional San Jos Costa Rica Tel 506 295 0000 Fax 506 295 0052 CROATIA EUROLINE d o o Kovinska 5 10 000 Zagreb Tel 385 1 3441 111 Fax 385 1 3441 113 CZECH REPUBLIC Chrysler Czech Republic s r o Daimler
117. ARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU TRAL N before recreational towing to pre vent damage to internal parts 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the transmission to PARK 2 Turn OFF the ignition 3 For vehicles with Keyless Enter N Go re move the Keyless Enter N Go button and use the key fob to complete this procedure Refer to Starting Procedures Keyless Enter N Go in Starting and Operating for further information 4 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN po Sition but do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the brake pedal 6 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 7 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object press and hold the recessed transfer case N Neutral button located by the selector Switch for four seconds until the light behind the N symbol starts to blink indicating shift in progr
118. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres sure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could dam age the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace nor mal tire care and maintenance or to pro vide warning of a tire failure or condition TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger the display of the TPM Telltale and the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regu larly check the tire
119. Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were pro vided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces 022609609 ISOFIX Anchorages 49 In addition there are top tether strap anchor ages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the outboard seats To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will expose the top tether AN strap anchorages Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap 50 022609772 Top Tether Strap Anchorage Located on Seatback WARNING Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load floor Improper usage of the tether can lead to a failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed any but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook
120. C Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument ee cluster will come on when the igni tion switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC System If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 5 TOW HAUL Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been se lected The TOW HAUL button is located in the center of the instru ment panel below the climate controls TOW HAUL 6 Turn Signal Indicator The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is op erated A tone will chime a
121. Engine Oil 274 Tachomielter i i s xe deseo Rex 158 Telescoping Steering Column 112 113 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 186 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 163 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 49 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 148 Tilt Steering Column Tip Start ati Ret wed uns 202 MSS a dni dr tdg a aure diee e 55 228 Air Pressure 228 CNS dont oed ea a 229 CHANGING enced eee 255 High Speed 229 Inflation Pressures 228 JACKING uuu e erm mrs 255 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 232 Pressure Warning Light 160 Radial 2 bcd Ge BAA Res 229 Replacement s 44 aa asa ke 230 ROBHON 21 504 ae n Pre eR gp d 231 Spare Tire 255 SPINNING dumm xh de a Ee 229 Tread Wear Indicators 230 Wheel Mounting 258 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 244 Torque Converter Clutch 207 Tow Haul Indicator Light 159 TOWING s oa is dal m gerere 241 262 Disabled Vehicle 262 cM 243 Recreational 248 Weight 246b bd S 243 Towing Eyes sess 261 Traction Control 221 Trailer Sway Control TSC 224 railer TOWINQ 241 Cooling System Tips 247 Minimum Requirements 245 Trailer and Tongue Weight 244 railer Towing Guide 243 Trailer Weight s ir
122. F WITH POWER SHADE IF EQUIPPED The command view sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead con sole 140 034433149 Command View Sunroof and Power Shade Switches WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants par ticularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while op erating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued e Ina collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly se cured too e Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the sunroof switch rearward for less than one second and release and the sunroof glass will automatically slide fully open from any position then stop This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the sunroof If the shade is closed when the sunroof switch is pressed the shade will automatically m
123. Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset 171 The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner E 72 Fuel Economy 906 999 OTE LOW FUEL HPG 1 20 Imi 041009379 Fuel Saver Mode On This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to in crease fuel economy Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This 172 estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or ve hicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will
124. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seatbelts are fastened BeltAlert triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph 8 km h The reminder sequence lasts for 96 seconds or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until front belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seatbelts If a front seatbelt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will chime as a single notification and illuminate the Seat Belt Reminder Light then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not ac tive when the front passenger seat is unoccu pied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passen ger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed NOTE e BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer e Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver or passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert
125. LOW mode The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels 4 LOW For further information on four wheel drive op eration and proper use refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped in Starting And Operating 17 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 18 Fuel Door Reminder The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located 19 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 20 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC White Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white telltales For further information refer to Electronic vehicle Information Center EVIC 21 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Amber Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber caution telltales For further information refer to Electronic vehicle Information Center 22 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Red Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red telltales For further information refer to Electronic vehicle Information Center EVIC 23 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic
126. M38 25 Amp All Door Lock Yellow tor Output Red straint Control Natural amp Unlock Diesel Lift ler Pump Export M33 10 Amp Powertrain CAUTION Only Red Controller e When installing the totally integrated power M26 10 Amp Driver Door Transmission module cover it is important to ensure the Red Switch Bank Controller cover is properly positioned and fully M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch M34 10 Amp Park Assist latched Failure to do so may allow water to Red Wireless Con Red Module Climate get into the totally integrated power module i Module Control System and possibly result in a electrical system eyless Entry Module Infra fail Module Red Sensor 9416 28 15 Amp Powertrain Compass Mod Continued Blue Controller ule Transmission M35 15 Amp Left Rear Controller Blue Parklamps 291 CAUTION Continued e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct am perage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected VEHICLE STORAGE f you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove fuse 27 in the Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM labeled Ignition Off Draw lOD 1 e Or disconnect the negative cable from the
127. NG e Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed con tainer Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sud den brake failure This could result in a accident e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Do not allow petroleum based fluid to con taminate the brake fluid Brake seal com ponents could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident Front Rear Axle Fluid For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is ser
128. NOTE When off roading it may be advisable to remove the ACC sensor The sensor is lo cated behind the front lower grille in the center of the vehicle After removing the lower fascia you may remove the lower sensor and bracket assembly 124 To remove the sensor follow these instructions 1 Unplug the connector by depressing the two tabs on the connector and pulling it out Do not pull by the wiring or use any tools to remove the connector 2 Remove the wiring christmas tree attach ment from the back of the bracket 3 Remove the two M6 fasteners that connect the bracket to the bumper NOTE Do not change the adjustment fasteners or pull the sensor off of the bracket Doing so may misalign the sensor Store the sensor and bracket assembly in a safe location The wiring and connector must be stowed properly after the sensor and bracket assembly is removed A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumper beam Insert the wiring connector into the connector plug NOTE When the sensor is removed Adaptive Cruise Control Normal Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning will not be avail able The cluster will display the warning ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sen Sor To reinstall the sensor and bracket assembly reverse the process above The fastener torque required to assembly the bracket back to the beam is 6 6 ft lbs 9 Nm ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC di
129. OT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main tained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or misposi tioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disas semble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flick
130. R EXTERIOR BULB HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOORLOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE INTERMITTI FAILURE OUTLET Low PEDALS SPEEDCONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE t d Xt Q 2 0 7 e BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW S agi ee PONE OUNE ener LOWER as SEAT WINDOW LIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING INTERMITTENT WIPER OUTLET MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE exes e 7 Dg mw FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD V DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE ELECTRONIC ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET 4 WINDOW DOWN STABILITY CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM e 200 E C A srake WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW MEM PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP AND LIFTGATE DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE _ E3 p F ai of n UJ p HAUL VOICE BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON C e e 4 way Nn D 20 Low LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDING DOOR MERGENCY LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER E HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW SRS EX AIC A E RIRBAG
131. REVERSE and when the vehicle is in DRIVE at or below 11 mph 18 km h ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle be hind or in front of the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem caus ing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYS TEM message to be displayed in the instrument cluster On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle includ ing small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sen sors will not be detected when they are in close proximity e The vehicle must be driven slowly when
132. Reinstall the socket 6 Hook inboard side of the lamp into the fascia pocket 7 Rotate lamp forward in car until lamp snaps back into the opening Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL The center high mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for re placement 073310730 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Rear License Lamp 1 Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove the license lamp lens 2 Pull bulb from socket 3 Replace bulb 4 Reinstall lens 295 FLUID CAPACITIES mula or equivalent U S Metric Fuel Approximate All Engines 24 Gallons 91 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters 3 0L Diesel Engine SAE 5W 30 Synthetic API Certified Low Ash 10 Quarts 9 5 Liters Cooling System 3 6L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or 10 4 Quarts 9 9 Liters equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula 15 4 Quarts 14 6 Liters or equivalent Without Trailer Tow Package 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula 16 Quarts 15 2 Liters or equivalent With Trailer Tow Package 3 0L Diesel Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 Year 100 000 Mile For 13 9 Quarts 13 2 Liters Includes heat
133. Stability Control ESC is off OFF 24 Vehicle Security Light This light will flash rapidly for ap proximately 15 seconds when the o vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 25 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper imits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the ve hicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your ve hicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Ve hicle Follow th
134. Suspen Sion to Aero Mode in High Range 4WD Low is not available in SPORT mode if 4WD Low is selected the Selec Terrain will automati cally switch back to AUTO Snow Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather Use on and off road on oose traction surfaces such as snow When in Snow mode depending on certain oper ating conditions the transmission may use second gear rather than first gear during aunches to minimize wheel slippage If equipped with air suspension the level will change to Normal Ride Height NRH if the transfer case is in high range The level will change to Off Road 1 if the transfer case is in Low range Auto Fully automatic full time four wheel drive operation can be used on and off road Balances traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and accel eration over two wheel drive vehicles If equipped with air suspension the level will change to NRH Sand Mud Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as mud sand or wet grass Driveline is maximized for trac tion Some binding may be felt on less for giving surfaces The electronic brake con trols are set to limit traction contro management of throttle and wheel spin equipped with air suspension the level wil change to Off Road 1 Rock Off road calibration only available in 4WD Low range The vehicle is raised i equipped with Air Suspension for improved ground clearanc
135. The mirror is twisted on the wind shield button counterclockwise and requires no tools for mounting Automatic Dimming Mirror 030434774 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during clean ing never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The outside mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts NOTE The passenger side outside mirror does not have this dimming feature Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 65 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas senger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other objects Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or
136. Use SAE 5W 30 Synthetic Low Ash Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 11106 and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 and ACEA C3 297 Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine RER8ZWYCB4 Gap 0 031 in 0 79 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine 91 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 91 Octane Acceptable 95 Octane Recommended Fuel Selection 3 0L Diesel Engine Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle The manufacturer requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel 15 ppm Sulfur maximum and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel 500 ppm Sulfur maximum to avoid dam age to the emissions control system For most year round service No 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D 975 Grade 515 will provide good performance If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold below 20F or 7C or is required to operate at colder than normal conditions for prolonged periods use climatized No 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No 2 diesel fuel with 50 No 1 diesel fuel This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax plugging of the fuel filters This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5 biodiesel meeting ASTM sp
137. W or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward re spectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or can press VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata art ist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode Screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say Repeat or Repeat Off Press the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 device scan mode which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the de sired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode pressing the SEEK and SEEK but tons will select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles be tween Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device or press VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing
138. a 243 Transfer Case 284 Maintenance 284 Transmission Automatic 203 284 Maintenance 284 A de mote dome Sees 203 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 18 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 17 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry mus deinde s dio dob S 17 Tread Wear Indicators 230 W rn Signals xu xg 159 293 294 UCI Connector 181 uconnect Hands Free Phone 72 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector sss 181 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 32 Upholstery Care 287 Vanity MINORS s ios xm ye 67 Variance Compass 175 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage 190 292 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 184 Viscosity Engine Oil 273 324 Voice Recognition System VR 90 Warning Flasher Hazard 254 Warning Roll Over 4 Warnings and Cautions 8 Washers Windshield 110 277 Washing Vehicle 286 Waxing and Polishing 286 Wheel and Wheel Trim 287 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 287 Wheel Mounting 258 Wind Buffeting 25 139 142 Window Fogging 190 WindOWS
139. a Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like Situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better under standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash in vestigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the ve hicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties
140. able to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few min utes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the dis charged vehicle 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the protective cover over the re mote positive battery post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charg ing system inspected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehic
141. ad limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Continued WARNING Continued e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improp erly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to Sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary Switch located on the control lever The control lever is located on the left side of the steering column 036409579 Rear Wiper Washer Control Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation Rotating the center portion upward once more will activate the washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release of the switch the wipers will resume the con tinuous rear wiper operation When this rotary control is in the OFF position rotating it down ward will activate the rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF position
142. ales These telltales include e Shift Lever Status The shift lever status P R N D L 5 4 3 2 1 are displayed indicating the shift lever position Telltales 5 4 3 2 1 indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS feature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed For further information on ERS refer to Starting And Op erating e Electronic Speed Control ON This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON For further information refer to Elec tronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Ve hicle e Electronic Speed Control SET This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Un derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 167 e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON This light will turn on when the ACC is ON For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET This light will turn on when the is SET For further informa RX tion refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Power Steering System Over Temp If Equipped If the POWER STEERING SYS TEM OVER TEMP message and a H icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have oc curred which caused an over tem perat
143. ame size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 12 Position Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on 200 13 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver or front passenger s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation 14 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake De functions including brake fluid level and parking brake applica tion If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been dete
144. ams on Automatic high beams off Service Four Wheel Drive System Four Wheel Drive System in neutral ECO Fuel Saver Indicator TERRAIN SETTINGS AUTOMATIC TERRAIN SETTINGS ROCK TERRAIN SETTINGS SAND MUD TERRAIN SETTINGS SNOW TERRAIN SETTINGS SPORT Sport Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required Rock Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners Manual For 4x4 Low Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low For 4x4 High Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low Terrain System Settings Not Available Raising Vehicle Ride Height with icon Lowering Vehicle Ride Height with icon Normal Vehicle Ride Height This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the ve hicle has achieved the Normal Vehicle Ride Height Off Road Ride Height Level 1 This mes sage is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Off Road Height Level 1 Off Road Ride Height Level 2 This mes sage is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Off Road Height Level 2 Vehicle Lowered Entry Exit Park Height This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Park Height Entry Exit Park Height in Progress This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the request is made to go into Entry Exit Height while the vehicle speed is between 15 and 25 mph This shows
145. ance Setting Change e System Cancel e Driver Override e System Off e ACC Proximity Warning e ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity Display Warnings And Maintenance Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility Such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the EVIC will display Clean Radar Sen sor In Front Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate The Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC System will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur Clean Radar Sensor in Front of Vehicle FCW OFF 032433103 Clean Radar Sensor Warning NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not
146. and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift e The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service pur poses The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located in rear cargo area below the load floor 060509588 Jack Storage Location Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing nut Preparations for Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery surfaces WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 3 Set the parking brake 4 Place the shift lever into PARK 5 Turn the ignition OFF 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel NOTE Passengers should not r
147. and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or re placed immediately JUMP STARTING f your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instruc tions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system volt age greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical System may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger s front seat There are remote loca tions located under the hood to assist in jump starting 060833 Remote Battery Posts 1 Remote Positive Post covered with protective cap 2 Remote Negative Post WARNING Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an i
148. and the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the parked position NOTE As a protective measure the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 sec onds Once the switch is released the pump will resume normal operation If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position If the liftgate flipper glass is open the rear window wiper washer functionality is inter rupted and the wiper stops at that park posi tion When the liftgate flipper glass is closed the rear wiper will resume wiper washer func tionality after five seconds Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mir rors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an ad ditional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the win dow Use a soft cloth and a mild washing sol
149. any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder 276 Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de pending on geographical area and fre quency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks wa ter lines or wet spots If any of these condi tions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessar
150. ard the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dan gerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seatbelt Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path 93 Passenger Power Seat If Equipped Some models are equipped with a six way power passenger seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat The Switch is used to control the movement of the seat and seat cushion Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rear ward the seat will move in the direction of the Switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of
151. ards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it 48 e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Older Children And Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 9 kg 20 lbs and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 9 to 18 kg 20 to 40 165 and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the ISOFIX child restraint anchorage system Refer to ISOFIX Child Seat Anchorage System The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 18 kg 40 Ibs but who are Still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the
152. are not observed Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could acceler ate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis sion Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the igni tion switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Five Speed Automatic Transmission Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to turning the ignition Switch to the LOCK position The ke
153. ated and using the proper restraint sys tem Reclining Rear Seat To recline the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat driver s outside mirror and radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed Driver Memory Switches Your vehicle is delivered with two RKE transmit ters One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to four RKE transmitters each one linked to either of the two memory positions Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the SET S button and a num bered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition Switch to the ON position 2 P
154. ated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the win dow The airbag inflates in about 30 millisec onds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle 44 Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate re Sponse to certain impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag de ployment if the communication network re mains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as
155. based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced NOTE Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is re duced e f the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present When ever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current oper ating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previ ously stored mode will be recalled and used Astronomy Zone System Temporarily Unavailable When the vehicle enters this zone the blind Spot system will become temporarily unavail able and the EVIC will display the message Blind spot system unavailable Astronomy zone The side mirrors LED s will be lit up an
156. before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tempera ture If the fluid level is correctly estab lished at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing 285 fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly cor rosive to the metal in your vehicle The following
157. ble decrease in fuel economy e Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel is a blend of Number 2 ULSD and Number 1 ULSD Diesel Fuels which reduces the tempera ture at which wax crystals form in fuel NOTE This engine requires the use of Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Use of incorrect fuel could result in exhaust system damage Re fer to Fuel Requirements Diesel Engine in Starting and Operating for further infor mation Battery Blanket Usage A battery loses 60 of its cranking power as the battery temperature decreases to O F 18 C For the same decrease in temperature the engine requires twice as much power to crank at the same RPM The use of battery blankets will greatly increase starting capability at low temperatures Suitable battery blankets are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer Engine Starting Procedure WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury 1 The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Watch for the Wait To Start Light in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information It will glow for two to ten 201 seconds or more depending on engine tem perature When the Wai
158. buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof open ing to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE To open the liftgate pull up on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate 022290770 Liftgate Release 26 WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle Liftgate Flipper Glass The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the liftgate is unlocked To open the flipper glass push up on the window switch located on the liftgate 022209771 Liftgate Glass Release Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass is open NOTE If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should occur an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emer gency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the lift gate trim panel WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle Power Liftgate If Equippe
159. button on the radio or press VR button and say Bluetooth Streaming Audio 184 Play Mode When switched to BTSA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehi cle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to Uconnect M phone sys tem Seven devices can be paired to Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected and played Selecting different Audio Device 1 Press PHONE button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Select Audio De vices 3 Say name of the audio device or ask Uconnect M phone system to list audio de vices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous track music on your cel lular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a BTSA device Only the current song that is playing will display info VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment Sys tem consists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered re mote control and two headsets Refer to the Uconnect Multimedia section of Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further de
160. button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing 74 When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between 1 and 7 with 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority 3 mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Ad vanced Phone Connectivity Dial By Saying A Number e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The syste
161. ce command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form com mand into two voice commands Phone book and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect M Phone from idle simply press thea button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect 73 Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone refer to Compatible Phones section to learn about the phone type To complete the pairing process you will need to reference your mobile phone owner s manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect M Phone pairing instructions e Press the we
162. ch plates or Automatic Lock ing Retractors ALR which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode To attach a child restraint tether strap For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat position with the vehicle seat belts the rear center seat position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the upward position To access the center seat arm rest tether first lower the arm rest The tether is located behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing gt 022633125 Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether 51 Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat backing then raise the
163. ches can be pro grammed to remain active for up to approxi mately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Program mable Features System Setup under Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further in formation NOTE Opening either front door will cancel this feature Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets that can be used to power cellu lar phones small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories The power out lets are labeled with either a key or a battery symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered Power outlets labeled with a key are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position while the outlets labeled with a bat tery are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times NOTE e All accessories connected to the bat tery powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against dis charge e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced The front power outlet is loca
164. cted by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Pro gram ESP system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been cor rected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked f brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Elec tronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is re quired Operat
165. ctivation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF gc 227 e TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 228 e Tire Pressure e sisse E REIHE P TRUE 228 e Tire Inflation Pressures 228 196 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leav ing unattended children in a vehicle is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driv ing gear 198 CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Using Fob With I
166. d The power liftgate may be opened by pulling up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the LIFTGATE but ton on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the LIFT GATE button on the RKE transmit ter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button lo cated on the front overhead console or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim near the liftgate opening Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim once will close the liftgate only this button cannot be used to open the liftgate To operate the power liftgate manually in the open direction pull the liftgate handle once to initiate a power cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put liftgate into manual mode When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE trans mitter is pressed two times the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC and the liftgate chime will be audible For further information refer to Customer Programmable Features System Setup Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Understanding Your Instrument Panel NOTE In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate an emergency liftgate latch release
167. d stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED NOTE For Uconnect Phone with Navigation or Multimedia radio refer to the Navigation or Multimedia radio s User s Manual separate booklet Uconnect Phone section Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Jim Work or Dial 151 1234 5555 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s au dio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone 72 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the Uconnect Phone and your mo ile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and nables you to mute the Uconnect Phone s icrophone for private conversation 3007 4 he Uconnect Phone is driven through your uetooth Hands Free profile mobile phone connect Phone features Bluetooth tech ology the global standard that enables dif ferent electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone al lows up to seven mobile phones to be linked t
168. d dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emer gencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control MA ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However 170 see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated en E gine condition As temperatures rise T and the gauge approaches this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If th
169. d dealer service the airbag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the left side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Ad vanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper left side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbag it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag The trim cover separa
170. d promptly with a damp cloth Stub born soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to 287 clean your leather upholstery Application of a eather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning pur poses Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respi ratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are ighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive mate rial to clean the lenses 288 Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use cau tion when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or oth
171. d your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buck led up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the ve hicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejec tion and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions How ever in an accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from oper ating to remove slack or prevent the seat belt assembly
172. da Mariscal Lopez No 5700 Asuncion Paraguay Tel 59521515911 Fax 59521515924 309 PERU Divemotor S A Calle Alejandro Bussalleu 151 Urb Sta Catalina La Victoria Lima Peru Tel 51 1 712 2000 Fax 51 1 712 2002 POLAND Chrysler Polska Sp z o o ul Gotlieba Daimlera 1 02 480 Warszawa Tel 801 330 300 PORTUGAL Chrysler Portugal S A Qta da Fonte Edif D Am lia Rua Victor C mara 2 19A 2770 229 Paco de Arcos Portugal Tel 351 0 21 323 91 00 Fax 4351 0 21 323 91 99 310 PUERTO RICO AND U S VIRGIN ISLANDS Chrysler International Services S A P O Box 191857 San Juan 009191857 Tel 7877825757 Fax 7877823345 ROMANIA S C Auto Rom S R L Bucuresti Bd Expozitiei nr 2 RO 78334 Tel 01 2240020 25 Fax 01 2241638 RUSSIA Chrysler RUS SAO 39A Leningradsky prospect 125167 Moscow Tel 7 495 745 2600 Fax 7 495 745 2601 SLOVENIA Chrysler Jeep Import d d Leskoskova 2 1122 Ljubljana Tel 01 5843 138 Fax 01 5843 222 SPAIN Chrysler Espa a S L Dpto De Atenci n al Cliente Chrysler Jeep y Dodge Apdo De Correos 24 19200 Azuqueca de Henares Guadalajara Tel 902 888 782 Fax 913 496 529 SWEDEN Chrysler Sverige Bronsyxegatan 14 Box 50530 S 202 50 Malm Tel 46 0 8 752 9858 Fax 46 0 8 752 6483 SWITZERLAND Chrysler Switzerland GmbH Bernstrasse 55 CH 8952 Schlieren Tel e German 0800 80 29 20 e French 0800 80 29 21
173. designed to prevent collisions ACC will allow you to keep cruise control en gaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e f the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or accel eration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead WARNING e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a conve nience system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the drivers responsibility to be attentive of road traffic and weather conditions ve hicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to fol low these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury e The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming vehicles and stationary objects e g a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Cannot take street traffic and weather conditions into account and may be limited upon adverse sight distance con ditions
174. devices can cause serious dam age Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use e Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 0 5 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Continued 229 CAUTION Continued Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle e Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the traction device manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h e Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire Treadwear Indicators These indicators are narrow strips 1 16 in 1 6 mm thick and are found in the tread pattern grooves When the tread pattern is worn down to these treadwear indicators the tires should be re placed 230 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire Overloading your vehicle long trips in very hot weather and driving on bad roads may result in greater wear Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless
175. ding CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty 216 Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to enter ing Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave ef fects Flowing Water f the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water evel recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches 23 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches 51 cm and reduce speed appro priately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 inches 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil trans mission oil axle transfer case
176. distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC con 121 tinues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately ap ply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead 83 BRAKE cc a 23456 RI Brake Alert Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speed ometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status 032435496 122 Menu Button Press the MENU button located on the steering wheel repeatedly until one of the following displays in the EVIC Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready ACC SET When ACC is set the set speed will display The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set WMUZ The Light The Atters He Lives ACC 55 mph RS Example Only 032433431 The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC activity occurs which may include any of the following Set Speed Change e Dist
177. driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Over loading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen Sion chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used be tween your vehicle and trailer Always con nect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued WARNING Continued TRONS Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a hill When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the trans fer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed be tween the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded GVWR GTW GAWR Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer itch utilized 245 Towing Requirements Tires Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trai
178. e Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if de sired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically down loads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the proce dure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if sup ported begins as soon as the phone Bluetooth wireless connection is made to the Uconnect Phone For example after you start the vehicle e Maximum
179. e ON OFF button again At this time the system will turn off and the EVIC will display Adaptive Cruise Control Off WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC System on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the System off when you are not using it To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed 3 F Cc 56789 mi m AS ACC Set 032435493 Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accel erate beyond the set speed If this occurs e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will dis play in the EVIC e The system will not be controlling the dis tance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be deter mined by the position of the accelerator pedal NE 83 F c Driver Override fe 55 032435494 Driver Override To Cancel The system will disable ACC without erasing the memory if e You softly tap the brake pedal e You depress the brake pedal You press the CANCEL switch e An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event oc curs e A Trailer Sway Control TSC event occurs e f the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL e The Electronic Stability Control Tractio
180. e Traction based tuning with improved steer ability for use on high traction off road surfaces Activates the Hil Descent Control for steep downhill control Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks deep ruts etc If equipped with air suspension the vehicle level will change to Off Road 2 If the Selec Terrain switch is in ROCK mode and the transfer case is switched from 4WD Low to 4WD High the Selec Terrain system will return to AUTO 211 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a mes sage will appear in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information QUADRA LIFT IF EQUIPPED Description The Quadra Lift air suspension system pro vides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a button 212 058110718 Selec Terrain Switch 1 Up Button 2 Down Button 3 Park Mode Indicator Lamp 4 Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp 5 Off Road 1 Indicator Lamp 6 Off Road 2 Indicator Lamp Normal Ride Height This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving e Off Road 1 OR1 Raises the vehicle ap proximately 1 3 in 33 mm 1 1 in 28 mm w AMS package This position should be the default position fo
181. e there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is re quired 226 Hill Descent Control HDC Four Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two Speed Transfer Case Only HDC maintains vehicle speed while descend ing hills during off road driving situations and is available in 4WD LOW range only To enable HDC press the HDC switch or put the Selec Terrain system in ROCK mode ROCK mode is only available in 4WD LOW range Hill Descent Switch When HDC is enabled the HDC icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster HDC will automatically apply the brakes to control down hill speed to the selected level when necessary on grades greater than approximately 8 It will usually not activate on level ground The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corre sponds to the transmission gear selected HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelera tor is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the original set speed HDC Operation in 4WD Low Range To enable HDC press the HDC switch or put the Selec Terrain V system in the ROCK mode The HDC icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster and will functi
182. e EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following System Status messages displays in the EVIC e System OK e System Warnings Displayed will display all currently active System Warnings e Tire Pressure Monitor System shows the current pressure of all four road tires For additional information refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Starting And Operating NE 83 F FM 101 9 Tire Pressure 28 m 29 29 30 PSI 56789 mi 041009895 Tire Pressure Display 173 NOTE e Tires heat up during normal driving con ditions Heat will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi 14 to 41 kPa during normal driving conditions Refer to Tires General Information Tire Inflation Pressures in Starting And Operating for additional information e Your system can be set to display pres sure units in PSI kPa or BAR Keyless Enter N Go Display If Equipped When the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed to change ignition switch positions the Keyless Enter N Go icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner of the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Starting And Operating for more information 174 NOTE Under certain conditions the display may be superseded by another display of higher priority But when the ignition switch posi tion is changed the display alway
183. e Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights come on when you open any door or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock any door They will remain on for approximately 30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or liftgate from distances up to approxi mately 33 ft 10 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE t
184. e light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the tempera ture reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Transmission Temperature Light This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid tem perature that might occur with se vere usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque con verter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road opera tion If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the trans mission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Indicator illuminated will eventu ally cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operat ing the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust compo nents and cause a fire Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Due Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oi change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will flash in the EVIC d
185. e maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continu ously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable System operation or sensor damage may re sult when using replacement equipment that is not of the s
186. e outside of the handle 021834092 Outside Door Handle Lock Button With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handle press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and liftgate 23 NOTE After pressing the door handle LOCK but ton you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either passive entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking e The passive entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door and rear doors which operate the front passenger and rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position 24 021935083 Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless Ent
187. e rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on the driver s side should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking NOTE Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with the theft alarm armed will result in the alarm sounding Insert the Key Fob even if the Key Fob battery is dead into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm To remove the emergency key slide the me chanical latch at the top of the Key Fob side ways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207762 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob With the Keyless Enter N Go feature the EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE e f you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the shift lever in PARK it may become trapped temporarily in the igni tion switch If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the Key Fob as described If a malfunction occurs the system may trap the key
188. e spare can be used as mounted If this is required correct the rotation as soon as possible to restore optimum wet performance TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Non Directional Tires Only Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for the proper maintenance intervals More fre quent rotation is permissible if desired The 231 reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed NOTE The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram EV 7 amp 9 XE 055703771 Tire Rotation 232 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pres sure The tire pressure will vary wi
189. e undercar riage at least once a month e Itis important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tail gate must be kept clear and open e f you detect any stone chips or scratches in he paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the re sponsibility of the owner e f your vehicle is damaged due to an acci dent or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your ve hicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsi bility of the owner e f you carry special cargo such as chemi fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e f a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners or equivalent are recom mended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid auto matic car washes that use acidic
190. e warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 26 Rear Fog Light Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC features a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster FM 103 5 Fuel Economy 200 km h 040909598 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display 163 The EVIC consists of the following System Status e Vehicle Information Warning Message Dis plays Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass Display e Outside Temperature Display e Trip Computer Functions The system allows the driver to select informa tion by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel 040909599 EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 164 UP Button Press and release the UP button to A scroll upward through the main menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Units System Setup and sub menus DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN but V ton to scroll downward through the main menus and sub menus SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus sub menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu Press and hold the SELECT button to reset features BACK Button Press the BACK button to scroll back to a previous menu or sub BACK 2 Electr
191. e weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or au thorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Mainte nance Schedule Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for the proper mainte nance intervals When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury acci dent Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dy namic load shifts can occur that may be diffi cult for the
192. e wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too e Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Continued WARNING Continued e t is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an acci dent people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 022635070 Latch Plate to Buckle WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle wi
193. ecification D 975 298 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed 4 product Transfer Case MOPAR 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Axle Differential Front Rear MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 API GL5 or equivalent with friction modifier additive Axle Differential Rear 5 7L Engine With Elec tronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 90 API GL5 or equivalent Axle Differential Rear 5 7L Engine Without Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 85 API GL5 or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir 3 6L Engine and 3 0L Diesel Engine MOPAR Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS 1165 such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s Power Steering Reservoir 5 7L Engine MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed 4 product 299 300 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook
194. ecirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Floor Defrost Mix and Defrost modes to im prove window clearing operation Recircula tion will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humid ity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning the air condition ing pressing the A C button on will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direc tion and blower speed to maintain comfort 190 As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the DEFROST mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation NOTE In some cases during high temperature trailer tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance may be reduced This is to help protect the engine from overheat ing during the high load condition Your air conditioning system is also equipped w
195. ectronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Parking Lights And Panel Lights DO To turn on the parking lights and instru ment panel lights rotate the headlight Switch clockwise To turn off the park ing lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Front And Rear Fog Lights If Equipped The front and rear fog lights may be operated as desired when visibility is poor due to fog The fog lights will activate in the following order Press the headlight switch once and the front fog lights come on Press the switch a second time and the rear fog lights will come on front fog lights stay on Press the switch a third time and the rear fog lights turn off front fog stays on Press the switch a fourth times and the front fog turns off For vehicles without front fog rear fog will activate on the first press 031433931 Fog Light Operation 107 Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the headlight switch is rotated to the its farthest upward position or if equipped when the UN LOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dim mer control all
196. ed in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associ ated with airbag system electrical components While the airbag system is de e Y 45 signed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermit tently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any en gine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good 46 Event Dat
197. een received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pres sure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to display the TPM Telltale and the TIRE LOW PRES SURE message Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the TPM Telltale and the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will still dis play In this situation the TPM Telltale and the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Unde sirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result Continued CAUTION Continued e
198. ehicle for fur ther information 60 40 Split Rear Seat To Lower Rear Seat Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still main tain some rear seating room NOTE Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seatback to fold down easily 99 1 Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat 030909670 Rear Seat Release NOTE e Do not fold the 60 rear seat down with the left outboard or rear center seat belt buckled e Do not fold the 40 rear seat down with the right outboard seat belt buckled 100 2 Fold the rear seat completely forward 030909671 Rear Seat Folded To Raise Rear Seat Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have diffi culty returning the seat to its proper position WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously in jured in a collision Children should be se
199. el for further information NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low ve hicle speeds and during parking maneu vers e If the condition persists see your autho rized dealer for service 5 7L Engine The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is inter rupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these conditions you will ob serve a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered nor mal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be ob tained as soon as possible
200. emain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 255 7 For vehicle equipped with Quadra Lift refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting and Operating for further information on disabling automatic leveling Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher e Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Continued 256 WARNING Continued Do not get under the vehicle when itis on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be ex tremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground E O DA BARRE Jack Warning Label CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools f
201. ent Panel and Controls 156 Lead Free Gasoline 237 HeadiResiS 2 4 crue Pos 97 nstrument Panel Lens Cleaning 288 Leaks Fluid 55 Headlights dacs omm 293 ntegrated Power Module Fuses 288 Liftgate a nS een on 26 Bulb Replacement 293 nterior Appearance 287 Liftgate Flipper Glass 26 Cleaning 288 ntermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 111 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 148 On With Wipers 105 MUFOCUCHION kk 2 3 e ue aL eriam amp 4 Light 5 55 iS g e erai en ET MEME 55 104 ar db 66 Airbag 42 43 45 54 158 319 Anti LOCK ai uc sac so RR 162 Automatic Headlights 105 Back Up edm 294 Brake Assist Warning 227 Brake Warning 161 Bulb Replacement 293 algo 146 Center Mounted Stop 295 Daytime Running 106 Dimmer Switch Headlight 104 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indi Gator uuu Re 227 2 5 cr hee Bee Re 55 c us BENE ae d acu 107 159 293 FUSES oue dori Se RIDERS RU S 288 Hazard Warning Flasher 254 Headlights 293 Headlights On With Wipers 105 High Beam Indicator 159 Hill Descent Control Indicator 159 Illuminated Entry
202. eone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 7 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 8 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 9 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise and remove the jack and wheel blocks 258 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 110 ft lbs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your autho rized dealer or at a service station 11 Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return it and the tools to the proper posi tions in the foam tray 12 Securely store the road wheel and jack in the cargo area Stowed Spare 13 Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as soon as possible properly secure the spare tire with the special wing nut torqued to 3 7 ft lbs 5 N m reinstall the jack and too kit foam tray and latch the rear load floor cover WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts
203. er N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the win dows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in se rious injury or death Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the win dow to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Driver And Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window Switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the win dow Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigger
204. er and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 296 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPARe Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol or equivalent Engine Oil Non ACEA Categories 3 6L En gine Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil ACEA Categories 3 6L Engine For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 Engine Oil Non ACEA Categories 5 7L En gine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade SAE 5W 30 engine oil ap proved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil ACEA Categories 5 7L Engine For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil 3 0L Diesel Engine
205. er case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED y Rear NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK NOTE cause fault codes to be set and or loss of CAUTION proper tie down tension Recreational Towing Quadra Trac 119 Quadra Drive II Four Wheel Drive Models The transfer case must be shifted into NEU TRAL N and the transmission must be placed in PARK for recreational towing The NEUTRAL N selection button is adjacent to the transfer case selector switch Shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL N can take place with the selector switch in any mode position e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing e Tow only in a forward direction Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe dam age to the transfer case e The transmission must be placed in PARK for recreational towing Continued CAUTION Continued e Before recreational towing perform the procedure outlined under Shifting into NEUTRAL N to be certain that the trans fer case is fully in NEUTRAL N Other wise internal damage will result e Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged Shifting Into NEUTRAL N W
206. er sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment This center con tains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A descrip tion of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart
207. ers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that eave the pedal area unobstructed and that are irmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are prop erly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e Never put floor mats or other floor cover ings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals e Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning e A
208. ervice includ ing a tuneup to manufacturer s specifications should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunc tioning operating conditions Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protec tion every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the en gine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant antifreeze Check the front of the A C con denser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears
209. ess The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the shift to N Neutral is complete A FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEU TRAL message will display on the EVIC Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to 249 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 051810686 Neutral Switch 8 Start the engine 9 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 10 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 250 11 Turn OFF the engine and leave the ignition Switch in the unlocked OFF position 12 Firmly apply the parking brake 13 Shift the transmission into PARK CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL N and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL N ensure that the engine is off prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 14 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar 15 Release the parking brake 16 Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it away from the negative battery post NOTE Steps 1 through 6 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEU TRAL N button and must continue to be met until the four seconds elapse and the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to press ing the NEUTRAL N button
210. ess than 11 mph 18 km h Under this condition Park Sense will not operate Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further in formation If the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS mes sage appears in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC and the rear fascia bumper or front fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction see your authorized dealer If SERVICE PARK AS SIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see your authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sen sors Otherwise you could damage the sen sors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vi brations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instru ment cluster will display PARK ASSIST OFF Furthermore once you turn Park Sense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE or DRIVE position and Park Sense is turned off the instrument clus ter will display PARK ASSIST OFF mes sage for as long as the vehicle is in
211. est inter action with the Advanced Front Airbags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Ad vanced Front Airbags work with the knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant pro tection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or
212. estraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC de termines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passen ger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact LO a Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 022607508 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in U
213. ever down 7 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL posi tion 8 The vehicle may then be started in NEU TRAL 9 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and install the rubber liner into the cup holder 261 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service If the transmission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting and Operating section NOTE Vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift must be lowered to the Park lowest level and have automatic leveling disabled before ty ing them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to the section on Quadra Lift for more information If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the Park level for example engine will not run tie downs must be fastened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and or loss of proper tie down tension Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground 4WD Models See instructions in Recreational Towing under Starting and Operating e Trans in PARK Flat Tow NONE e T case in NEUTRAL e Tow in forward direction Front NOT ALLOWED Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Hoar NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use onl
214. ever the engine is running and the transmission is not in the PARK position The lights will remain on until the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake is engaged The headlight Switch must be used for normal nighttime driv ing Disabling The Daytime Running Lights To disable the Daytime Running Lights open the hood and located the Power Distribution Center PDC located on the right side of the engine compartment PDC Location Open the PDC by pulling outward on the lock ing tabs one on each side and pulling upward on the cover Locking Tab Remove the left and right Daytime Running Lamp relays and reinstall the PDC cover Daytime Running Light Relays Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only This feature prevents the headlights from inter fering with the vision of oncoming drivers Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the head light switch is cycled off Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight Switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an El
215. f collision 38 This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passen ger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad vanced Front Airbags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to pro tect the driver front and rear passengers sit ting next to a window The SABIC airbags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immedi ately Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the follow ing airbag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Driver Side Knee Airbag e Knee Impact Bolster e Driver Advanced Front Airbag e Passenger Advanced Front Airbag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Cur ains SABIC e Front and Side Impact Sensors
216. f travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly 81869557 Turns And Bends In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves 818e955e 125 Using ACC On Hills When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic conditions and the steep ness of the hills ACC performance may be limited Lane Changing ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is com pletely in the lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown ACC has not yet de tected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the 126 ACC system to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary 818e9563 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges ofthe lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead 818e9567 Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stat
217. f you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will turn on and the EVIC will still display a Low Pressure message and a flashing pressure value in the graphic display After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message and then display dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the origi nal road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information TPMS Deactivation The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with wheel and tire a
218. fascia bumper and the detected obstacle WARNING Object Detected 1 ft U 032937952 Park Assist Display ParkSense Display The warning display will turn ON indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected Park Assist System On 032937949 Park Assist ON 131 The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from Slow to fast to continuous WARNING Object Detected 1 fit WU 032937952 Slow Tone 132 WARNING Object Detected M ef S Fast Tone 032937951 WARNING Object Detected m Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle WARNING ALERTS Display Message Park Assist ON Rear Distance in cm Greater than 79 in 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less Than 12 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 30 cm Front Distance in cm Greater than 47 in 47 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less Than 12 in 120 cm 120 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 30 cm Audible Alert Chime None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Second Tone
219. filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before start ing the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required WARNING Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water
220. flation pressure for pas senger cars is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar For vehicles other than passenger cars the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on the driver s side B pillar glove box door or the Certifica tion Label The tire pressure should be checked and ad justed at least once every month Check more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with tem perature changes Inflation pressures specified on the chart are always Cold Inflation Pressure Cold inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has been idle for at least three hours or driven less than a mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum values molded into the tire sidewall Tire pressures may increase from 2 to 6 psi 0 14 to 0 41 bar 14 to 41 kPa during opera tion DO NOT reduce this normal pressure buildup High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe Speeds within posted speed limits Where Speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds correct tire inflation pressure is very important Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Always use radial tires in sets of four Never co
221. forma tion 3 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL 17 is part of an onboard diagnostic sys tem called OBD II that monitors en gine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when 158 turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situa tions the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Im mediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as refer enced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 4 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ES
222. formation on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the re quirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR 241 Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equip ment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be sup ported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in com bination 242 NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over
223. he System is enabled The ParkSense system uses four sensors lo cated in the rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in 200 cm away from the rear bumper fascia The ParkSense system 133 uses six sensors located in the front bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 47 in 120 cm away from the front bumper fascia The warning display located above in the In strument Clusters EVIC provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object Service The ParkSense Park Assist System When the ParkSense Park Assist System is malfunctioning the instrument cluster will actu ate a single chime once per ignition cycle The instrument cluster will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS message when any of the rear sensor s is blocked by snow mud or ice and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE The instrument cluster will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS message when any of the front sensor s is blocked by snow mud or ice and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE or DRIVE The instrument cluster will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message when any of the rear or front sensors are damaged and require service When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE or DRIVE and the 134 System has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE or DRIVE at speeds l
224. he specified engine coolant antifreeze as Soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine cool ant antifreeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended 280 Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows ex tended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to 5 Years or 105 000 miles 168 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended main tenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using Antifreeze Coolant 5 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 5096 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 37 C are antici pated Use only high purity water such as distil
225. he Breakdown service number has to be setup before using To setup press the we button and say Setup Breakdown Service and follow prompts Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate re sponse selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 3t you can press the button and say 3 746 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated cus tomer service center
226. he radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Compatible Phones The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 1 0 or higher See Uconnect website for supported phones www chrysler com uconnect www dodge com uconnect www jeep com uconnect To find the list of compatible phones navigate through the following menus e Select model year for the vehicle e Select type of the vehicle e In the getting started tab select compatible phones Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect M Phone menu structure Voice com mands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound com mands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice com mand is given You can also break the com mands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voi
227. he speed desired press the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer To Vary The Speed Setting There are two ways to change the set speed Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the ve hicle to the desired speed and press the SET button e Tap the RES or SET button to increase or decrease the set speed in 0 6 mph 1 km h increments respectively Hold the RES or SET button for 6 mph 10 km h increments To Cancel The system will disable normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if e You softly tap or depress the brake pedal You press the CANCEL button e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Con trol System ESC TCS activates To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed 127 To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push the ON OFF button e You turn off the ignition e You engage Four Wheel Drive Low If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the last driver setting ACC or Normal Cruise Control Forward Collision Warning If Equipped Forward Collision Warning FCW warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the co
228. hen driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from enter ing the vehicle FUEL REQUIREMENTS DIESEL ENGINE Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier For most year round service No 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D 975 Grade 515 will provide good performance If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold below 20 F or 7 C or is required to operate at colder than normal conditions for prolonged periods use climatized No 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No 2 diesel fuel with 50 No 1 diesel fuel This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax plugging of the fuel filters This vehicle must only use premium diesel fuel that meets the requirements of EN 590 Biodiesel blends that meet EN 590 may also be used 239 CAUTION The manufacturer requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel 15 ppm Sulfur maximum and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Die sel fuel 500 ppm Sulfur maximum to avoid damage to the emissions control system WARNING Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent They can be unstable under certain conditions and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water To prevent fuel system trouble drain the accu mulated water from the fuel water separator using the provided fuel water separator drain If
229. her or not his her gasoline contains MMT Materials Added to Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy reduce emissions and maintain vehicle perfor mance Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided Many of these ma terials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredi ents These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to pre vent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the ve hicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short pe riod adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions re paired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Continued WARNING Continued e Keep the liftgate closed w
230. hift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 4WD AUTO This range is used on surfaces such as ice snow gravel sand and dry hard pavement NOTE Refer to Selec Terrain If Equipped in Starting and Operating for further infor mation on the various positions and their intended usages NEUTRAL This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operat ing for further information 4WD LOW This range is for low speed four wheel drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed It provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h NOTE Refer to Selec Terrain If Equipped for further information on the various positions and their intended usages Shifting Procedures 4WD HI to 4WD LOW With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and press the 4WD LOW button once on the transfer case switch The 4WD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete
231. icle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your autho rized dealer Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sen Sor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer 130 ACCIFCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 56 89 mi 032433104 ACC FCW Unavailable Warning PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE If ParkSense is enabled at one of these shift lever positions the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi mately 11 mph 18 km h or
232. ile turn by turn until the final destination is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Unlock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL posi tion and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been acti vated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Unlock Sequence When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected 177 NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock AII Doo
233. ile ACC is set the set speed can be de creased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the Set speed will continue to decrease in 6 mph 10 km h increments until the button is re leased The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the SET button once will result in a 0 6 mph 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a de crease of 0 6 mph 1 km h NOTE e When you use the SET button to decel erate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will auto matically slow the vehicle e The ACC system can only apply a maxi mum of 25 of the vehicle s braking ca pability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill How ever a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or de scending downhill This is normal opera tion and necessary to maintain set speed Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 medium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 3 TEENS mi er
234. ilure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up IMPORTANT NOTICE ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLI CATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFORMA TION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICATION APPROVAL THE RIGHT IS RESERVED TO PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering spe cialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supple mented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Fol lowing the instructions and recommendations in this Owner s Manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle After you have read the Owners Manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or to make additions to or improvements in its products without imposing any obligations upon itself to install them on products previ
235. injury or death CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path Continued CAUTION Continued To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning ParkView On Or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Press the camera setup soft key 4 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting the enable rear camera in reverse soft key and pressing the save soft key Turning ParkView On Or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and storage for sunglasses Power liftgate and power sunroof switches may also be included if equipped 033333450 Overhead Console 137 Courtesy Reading Lights Located
236. inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle specific light and auto matically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced the SmartBeam mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer 105 To Activate 1 Enable the Automatic High Beams Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further in formation 2 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO head light position 3 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the ve hicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you or rearward in car to manually deactivate the system normal operation of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system 106 NOTE Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions sticker toll box etc on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights low intensity come on when
237. ion locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substi tute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured e Do not leave the key fob in the ignition Switch A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Be sure the parking brake is fully disen gaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident e Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake sys tem serviced by an authorized dealer imme diately ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS T
238. ion of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for approximately two sec onds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 161 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 15 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will fas turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is 162 turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 16 4 LOW This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four wheel drive
239. ionary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 18 mph 30 km h To change modes press the MODE button when the system is in either the OFF READY or SET position Cruise Ready will be displayed if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position Cruise Off will be displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position To switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode press the MODE button a second time WARNING In the normal Cruise Control mode the sys tem will not react to vehicles ahead In addi tion the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to vehicle distance is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches t
240. ir voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two follow ing procedures From outside the Uconnect V Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the c VR button for five seconds until the session begins or Press the c VR button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command You can either press the Uconnect M Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset press the button After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters awa
241. irmations Prompts On Setup Confirmations Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect M Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dial ing a number with your paired Bluetooth mo bile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the Uconnect M Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be ab
242. isplay for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oi change interval The engine oil change indica tor system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indica tor system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty DTE e Miles Per Gallon MPG Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following information Average
243. ission will resume normal opera tion The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to the most desirable gear if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When to Use TOW HAUL Mode If Equipped When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent trans mission shifting occurs press the TOW HAUL Switch This will improve performance and re duce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When oper ating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift into direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled under steady cruise conditions 051210681 TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the Switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine speed and load an upshift fol lowed shortly thereafter by a downshift may occur The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will turn off This is normal part of the overheat protection strategy when operating in the TOW HAUL mode Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Trans mission Lim
244. itch between manual mode and automatic modes 11 Blower Control There are seven blower speeds the blower Speed increases as you move the control to the right from the lowest blower setting Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 12 Climate Control ON OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Cli mate Control OFF 187 13 Mode Control Button Press and release to select between Modes Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 14 SYNC Button Press and release to control the temperature setting for both zones from the driver tempera ture control 15 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent tempera ture control Push the button for cooler tem perature settings 16 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent tempera ture control Push the button for warmer tem perature settings Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front passenger temperature control but 188 tons Once the desired temperature is dis played the system will achieve and automati cally maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level itis not necessary to change the settings You wi
245. ith an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial Recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located di rectly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubri cation to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Operating Tips Chart S a WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS 27 and tum on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level with A C on If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on A C If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level lt 4 with A C on Adjust Temperature control for comfort COOL OR COLD DR
246. ition away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec tronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply System that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes discon nected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag o Warning Light in the instrument ry panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorize
247. key by sliding the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE trans mitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207762 Emergency Key Removal 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwariver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 021334199 Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot 021334198 Separating RKE Transmitter 3 Remove and replace the battery When re placing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier frequency of 433 92 MHz Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two condi tions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The ex pected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station towe
248. l press and hold the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only an swer an incoming call or ignore it 78 Making A Second Call While Current Call In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the we button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button until you hear single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the button until you hear single beep indicating that the
249. lcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low tempera tures especially if used for long periods e Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged the Electronic Speed Contro takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are lo cated on the right side of the steering wheel S y cance Er fl 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by push ing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than
250. le as pos sible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from act ing on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi tions ESC cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESC system has two available operating modes in 4WD HIGH range and one operating mode in 4WD LOW range High Range Four Wheel Drive Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD HIGH range Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to 4WD HIGH range the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off mode for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the BLD feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC func
251. le in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time Forward Rlert Timing OFF Near D 5 WP Example Only 032435760 Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which al lows for a more dynamic driving experience Forward Alert Timing OFF Far D Example Only 032435759 Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you Forward Alert Timing Hear Far ge P Example Only 032435758 NOTE In the Off setting FCW OFF will be dis played in the EVIC WMUZ The Light The Afters He Lives 56789 mi FCW OFF FCW Off Example 032033147 NOTE e The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down e FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects ground reflec tions objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away on coming traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed 129 e FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the unavailable screens FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Veh
252. le s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will dis charge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting TOW EYES Your vehicle is equipped with tow eyes which are mounted in the front and the rear CAUTION Tow eyes are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow eyes for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes Tow straps and chains may break caus ing serious injury SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN po sition without starting the engine 3 Remove the rubber liner from the cupholder located next to the shifter on the center con sole 4 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully remove the shift lever override access cover located on the bottom of the cupholder 051210756 Shift Lever Override Access Cover 5 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 6 Using the screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the shift lock l
253. le to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect M Phone e Press the button e Following the beep say Mute off 81 Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the c VR button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone the Uconnect M Phone follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the we button to begin 82 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced p
254. le unattended e With Keyless Enter N Go always remem ber to place the ignition in OFF At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identifica tion Number PIN Keep the PIN in secure ocation This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle ignition keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key9 operates on a carrier fre quency of 433 92 MHz The Sentry Immo bilizer system is subject to the following condi tions e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the hood iftgate liftgate flipper glass vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audio and visual signals the horn will pulse the head ights will flash the park lights will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instru
255. lected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes func tion differently Always confirm which mode is selected Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system ONIOFF SET CANCEL 1 DISTANCE SETTING 2 RES 3 SET 4 CANCEL 5 ON OFF 6 MODE 117 NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 18 mph 30 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Off NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions When in Four Wheel Drive Low When you apply the brakes When the parking brake is set e When the automatic transmission is in PARK REVERSE or NEUTRAL 118 e When pushing the RES button without a previously set speed in memory To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button The ACC menu in the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Ready Adaptive Cruise Control Ready 56789 mi Adaptive Cruise Control Ready 032433097 To turn the system OFF push and release th
256. led or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant an tifreeze and will require more frequent en gine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine cool ant antifreeze when the engine is over heated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine
257. ler usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires Gen eral Information in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Re placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits 246 Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake sys tem or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inad equate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake con troller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 lbs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 1 654 Ibs 750 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehi cle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it
258. lights 105 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 186 Automatic Transmission 203 284 Adding Fluid 285 Fluid and Filter Changes 284 Fluid Level Check 284 285 Fluid 284 Special Additives 284 Torque Converter 207 Autostick ocio oo E RR 204 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 142 Auxiliary Power Outlet 142 Battery coude Re Rx ARM s 274 Keyless Transmitter Replacement amma send sd 18 Belts Seat 29 54 Blind Spot Monitoring 67 Body Mechanism Lubrication 276 Brake Assist System 222 Brake Control System Electronic 221 Brake Fluid 282 Brake System 282 Anti Lock ABS 221 Fluid Check lt a ee hk os 282 Master Cylinder 282 IParkilig od he ee PS Soe eus 220 Warning Light 161 Brake Transmission Interlock 203 Break In Recommendations New Mision 53 Bulb Replacement 292 293 Bulbs Eight x es 55 Calibration Compass 175 Camera Rear 136 Capacities Fluid 296 Caps Filler Fuel uaa BE PES 240 Power Steering 219 Radiator Coolant Pressure 280 Car Washes 286 Carbon Monoxide Warning 54
259. ll be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after a maximum of 55 minutes of continuous opera tion At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear pas sengers to operate the seats independently The heated seat switches for each heater are located on the rear of the center console You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heat ing elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat
260. ll experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function auto matically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the tempera ture settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the tem perature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features NOTE Each of these features operate indepen dently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually temperature control will continue to operate automatically There are seven fixed blower speeds Use the outer dial control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control clock wise decreases when you move the control counter clockwise The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed Speed by adjusting the blower control outer dial The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds a
261. ll hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating positions with a combination lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 34 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down ward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt asse
262. ll not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you e A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the in side surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Continued WARNING Continued e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 below your abdomen To remove slack in the ap portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To Position the lap belt across your thighs oosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the plate and pull on the lap belt A snug reduces the risk of sliding under the belt atch belt in an accident WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in an accident The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but acr
263. ller plug located on the back side of the transfer case The fluid level should be at the bottom edge of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level position Adding Fluid Add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole when the vehicle is in a level position Drain First remove fill plug then remove drain plug Recommended tightening torque for drain and ill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs 20 to 34 Nm CAUTION When installing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only the manufacturers recommended luid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 284 Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant t is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmis sion performance Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Flu ids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recom mended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid cause deterioration in transmission shift qual ity and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur er s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid
264. llision 128 FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is probable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When the system determines a collision with the ve hicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated NW 83 F BRAKE A 23456 mi 032433107 FCW Message NOTE The minimum speed for FCW activation is 10 mph 16 km h WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not in tended to avoid a collision on its own nor can FCW detect every type of collision The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steer ing Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Changing FCW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The FCW Status Off Near or Far will be displayed in the EVIC FCW settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in PARK The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehic
265. lways make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped un der the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control e f required mounting posts must be prop erly installed if not equipped from the fac tory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exte rior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and lock ing Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight park ing for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately 55 56 58 e DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED 101 Setting Memory Positions a
266. m the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged locked NOTE For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position roll down the win dow and open the door using the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE sys tem and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehi cle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings 21 Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e If a passive entry door handle has not been used for 72 hours the passive entry feature for the handle may time out Pull ing the deactivated front door handle will reactivate the door handle s passive entry feature e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the passive entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower response time e If you unlock the doors using the passive entry door handles but do NOT pull the handle the doors will automatically lock after 60 seconds To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter wi
267. m will prompt you to say the num ber you want to call For example you can say 151 1234 5555 e The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name e Press the we button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect M Phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phone book e The Uconnect Phone will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone num ber which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phone book is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the we button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended For ex ample say Robert Smith or Robert in stead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designa tion e g Hom
268. mage 286 Park Sense System Rear 130 Parking Brake sic 220 Personal Settings 177 dia ub deb atten NS 53 Pets Transporting 53 Phone Cellular 72 Phone Hands Free uconnect 72 Polishing and Waxing 286 Power Door EockS 4 uxo m sas 20 MEGAS il uu luce 27 M OS uam E 66 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 142 SealS aue d dre nn 93 94 Steering 218 219 SUDIOOf 4 4 0 2 eas a de 138 140 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 113 WIDdOWS on sue eh RR de 24 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts Preparation for Jacking Programmable Electronic Features Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry Radio Sound Systems Radio Operation ive Wiper System Rear Cupholder Rear Fog Lights Rear Park Sense System Rear Seat Folding Rear Window Defroster Rear Window Features Rear Wiper Washer Rearview Mirrors Recorder Event Data Recreational Towing 248 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral Wie uos etm ee oR 249 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral NVC s a de ener ate eh a 251 Helrlgerart asm 0 Sake we T 275 Reminder Seat Belt 36 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 17 Remote Sound System Radio CONO Suc ae dui ERA Re 185 Replacement Bulbs 292 Replacement Keys
269. mati cally turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the igni tion is ON Front Map Reading Lights The front map reading lights are mounted in the overhead console 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights Each light can be turned on by pressing a Switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed n 033333449 Ambient Light Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031433151 Front Map Reading Light Switches Ambient Light The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light feature This light casts illumina tion for improved visibility of the floor center console and PRNDL area 031509530 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn sig
270. mbine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewal lexing Consult your dealer for radial tire re pairs Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice condi tions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure A tire could ex plode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tire Chains Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body clearance Follow these recommenda tions to guard against damage e Install on Rear Tires Only e Due to limited clearance use SAE class S low profile cables or traction devices only Security Chain Company SCC Super Z6 52 441 cables or equivalent are recom mended WARNING Using tires of different size and type M S Snow between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions e Because of restricted traction device clear ance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only trac tion devices in good condition are used Broken
271. mbly Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occu pant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu pant Restraint Controller ORC Like the air bags the pretensioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable components and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head re straint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How the Active Head R
272. ment cluster will flash 15 To Arm The System Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Security Light will flash If it does not illuminate the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is not arming Also if you open a door during the arming period the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming process If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after closing the door you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go Press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button until the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC indicates that the vehicle ignition is OFF refer to Starting Procedures in Start ing And Operating for further information Then either press the power door LOCK switch 16 while the driver or passenger door is open press the lock button on the front driver or passenger door handle with a valid key fob in range or press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter LOCK button refer to Key less Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information To Disarm The
273. menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect Phone book entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the button say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone num ber associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Conf
274. n derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 35 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the de ployed AHR at a comfortable position 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 36 022607497 1 Downward Movement 2 Rearward Movement 3 4 022607757 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half 022607494 AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems reset ting the Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified special ist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts This feature is active whenever the igni tion is on
275. n Con trol System ESC TCS activates NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off ESC will automatically be re engaged Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled 56789 mi 032433100 Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push the ON OFF button e You turn OFF the ignition e You switch to Four Wheel Drive Low To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed 119 NOTE You can resume ACC from a minimum of 18 mph 30 km h WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation This could cause a collision and or serious injury To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set Speed by pressing and holding the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 6 mph 10 km h increments until the button is re leased The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display 120 Pressing the RES button once will result in a 0 6 mph 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 0 6 mph 1 km h Wh
276. n includes an elec tronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear for 3 6L and 3 0L Diesel engine fourth and fifth 205 gears for 5 7L engine The transmission will automatically shift to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal op erating temperature vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h the TOW HAUL switch has not been acti vated transmission has reached normal operating temperature NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid tem perature has risen to a suitable level Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section 206 During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on en gine and transmission temperature This feature improves the warm up time of the engine and transmission If the transmission temperature gets ex tremely hot the transmission will automati cally select the most desirable gear for op eration at this temperature f the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP message may display and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down After cool down the transm
277. n loose NOTE The ENGINE START STOP button should only be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK position OFF position for Key less Enter N Go Normal Starting Using the ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and at tempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the crank ing of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two sec onds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Ne
278. nadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 2 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK Turn off the heater radio and all unneces sary electrical accessories 3 Remove the protective cover over the re mote positive battery post Pull upward on the cover to remove it 259 4 f using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result Jump Starting Procedure WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 260 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper c
279. nal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your head lights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released 109 High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instru ment panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the left side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a Switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle 110 031509530 Windshield Wiper Washer Switch Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation 031509578 Windshield Wiper Operation CAUTION Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the park position If the wind shield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur
280. nd the EVIC will display Low Tire Pressure message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR TIRE 35 3 34 PSI 24 amp 34 8197133c Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehi cles recommended cold tire pressure The system will automatically update the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flash ing and the Low Pressure text message s will Switch off once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning When a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 sec onds then remain on solid and a chime will sound The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message This message is then fol lowed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being re ceived 235 NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI
281. nd Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory 101 e Memory Position Recall 102 e To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory 102 eJEasyiEntry ExitiSeat ud CETTE 103 e TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 103 e LIGHTS cree a o 104 Headlight Switch oi EE etc roue rem Str 104 e Automatic Headlights If Equipped 105 e Headlights On Automatically With Wipers 105 e SmartBeam If Equipped 105 e Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 106 e Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only 107 e Headlight Delay 107 e Parking Lights And Panel Lights 107 Front And Rear Fog Lights If Equipped 107 e Interior Lights acsee a aaa a S p 108 o Lights On Reminder nin 108 Saver bono oe na at oem ton 108 e Front Map Reading Lights 108 Ambient Light 109 60 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation e Activating Adaptive Cruise Control exTo Activale e To Set A Desired ACC Speed ao bho Hin I e To Resume Speeds 2 e To Vary The Speed Setting e Setting The Following Distance e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu
282. nd an EVIC message will appear if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 1 6 km 7 High Beam Indicator Indicates that headlights are on high beam 8 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the t front fog lights are on 9 Hill Descent Control Indicator Light If Equipped The symbol indicates the status of af the Hill Decent Control HDC fea e ture The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator lamp will flash on off 10 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven Regulations require that upon transfer of ve hicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be su
283. nderstands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing The Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Com mand is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following com mands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e Setup to switch to system setup Radio Am Or Radio Long Wave Or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the ne
284. nditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condi tion may be lessened or eliminated by relocat ing the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio perfor mance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recom mended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped e The Automatic Temperature Control ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupants to select individual comfort set tings e When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode operation Auto blower operation is set by using a push button on the control unit and a comfort temperature setting by using the temperature up and down buttons The system provides set and forget opera tion for optimum comfort and convenience The system can be controlled manually if desired The ATC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 1 A C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illumi nates when A C is ON Performing this function
285. neuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electro hydraulic power steering system expe riences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist then the system wil provide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool If the SERVICE POWER STEER ING SYSTEM message and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the el dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP message and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steer ing maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power Steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Pan
286. ng overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supple ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could dam age your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel e Being under a jacked up vehicle is danger ous The vehicle could slip off the jack
287. ng the height change to Park Mode the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h the height change will be paused until the vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph 24 km h and the height change continues to Park Mode or exceeds 25 mph 40 km h and the vehicle height will return to NRH Park Mode may be selected while the vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still run ning and all doors remain closed ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road appli cations Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu vers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS NOTE Prior to off road driving remove the front air dam to prevent damage The front air dam is attached to the lower front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand 053810760 Front Air Dam 1 Front Bumper 2
288. ng the trans mission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the park ing brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off f you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Fea tures in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 225 Ready Alert Braking Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time re quired to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emer gency braking situation may occur by monitor ing how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake System uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support Rain Brake Support may improve braking per formance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is activ
289. not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another colli Sion the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steer ing wheel hub trim cover or the upper left side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e t is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your airbag system The airbag may inflate ac cidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any airbag sys tem service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be servic
290. not functioning properly and that service is re quired EVIC Red Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include e Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more door may be ajar e Liftgate Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate may be ajar e Liftgate Flipper Glass Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate flipper glass may be p ajar Oil Pressure Warning Light Qu This light indicates low engine oil pres sure The light should turn on momen tarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the elec trical charging system The light should come on when the ignition Switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s 169 non essential electrical devices or increase en gine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging sys tem Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorize
291. nstead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure ISOFIX compatible child restraint systems are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages Child seats with fixed lower at tachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment never install ISOFIX compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing ISOFIX compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the ISOFIX anchors or the vehi cle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not ISOFIX compatible you can only install the child re straints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Instaling The ISOFIX Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions Installing The ISOFIX Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here
292. nt Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle accel eration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades re fer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintain ing Your Vehicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of opera tion This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indi cation of difficulty Additional Requirements For Diesel Engine If Equipped During the first 1500 km avoid heavy loads e g driving at full throttle Do not exceed 2 3 of the maximum permissible engine speed for each gear Change gear in good time
293. ntegrated Key Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will con tinue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition Switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 sec onds then repeat the Normal Starting proce dure Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to operate the ig nition switch with the push of a button as long as the ENGINE START STOP button is installed and the Remote Keyless 050105203 Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger com partment Installing and Removing the ENGINE START STOP Button Installing the Button 1 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 2 Insert the ENGINE START STOP button into the ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable 3 Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into position Removing the Button 1 The ENGINE START STOP button can be removed from the ignition switch for key fob use 2 Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the chrome bezel at the 6 o clock posi tion and gently pry the butto
294. nu German Enter Number Phonebook Flowchart Breakdown gency English Italian Number on Phone Flowchart Francais Last Dutch See is redialed Number The 32 name language associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030609126 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Phonebook Enter Name Entries Listed 916 Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook Cleared Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 87 Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation Pairing Emergency Breakdown Select Phone Language Prompts i ompts Service Toggle List Phones New phone Select a language Confirmation will Prompts temporaril on off y Say 4 digit System Lists override pin code Phones S phone elect phone uin to be deleted List Phones priorities Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists confirms Phones Phone Deleted All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in
295. o the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the Uconnect Phone at a time The Uconnect Phone is available in English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish languages as equipped CU WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel con trols if equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone we button and Voice Command button that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with radio The individual buttons t VR are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phones Some phones may not support all the Uconnect Phone features Refer to your mo bile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control if so equipped T
296. o Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph 48 km h and 35 mph 56 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph 48 km h The vehicle will enter Aero Mode regardless of vehicle speed if the Selec Terrain knob is turned to the SPORT position Turning the Selec Terrain knob to the AUTO position will return the system to normal operation Park Mode Lowers the vehicle approxi mately 1 5 in 38 mm This position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo To enter Park Mode press the Down button once while the vehicle speed is below 25 mph 40 km h Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph 24 km h the vehicle height will begin to lower If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h for greater than 60 seconds or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the Park Mode change will be cancelled To exit Park Mode press the Up button once while in Park Mode or drive the vehicle over 15 mph 24 km h The Selec Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the Selec Terrain switch The height can be changed from the default Selec Terrain setting by normal use of the air suspension buttons Refer to Selec Terrain in Starting and Operating for further informa tion The sys
297. o memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driv er s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driv er s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the driver s door dur ing a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat and driver s mirror stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 2 Press and release MEMORY button number 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Press and release the memory SET S but ton located on the driver s door 4 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 on the driver s door 5 Within five seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To disable another RKE transmitter linked
298. ocated on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Cur tains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occu pants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an im pact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or ISOFIX feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information refer to ISOFIX Child Seat Anchorage Sys tem NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint System properly to keep you and your passen gers as safe as possible WARNING In an accident you an
299. of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be in spected regularly for wear and correct inflation pressure The manufacturer strongly recom mends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in quality and performance when re placement is needed see section on tread wear indicators Failure to use equivalent re placement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recom mend that you contact your local authorized dealer on any questions you may have on tire Specifications or capability WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimen sions and performance characteristics re sulting in changes to steering handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle e Never use a tire smaller than the minimum tire size listed on
300. on If the vehicle speed goes above 20 mph 32 km h the HDC icon will flash and HDC will not function To disable HDC press the HDC Switch 4WD Low Range Set Speeds e ist 1 mph 1 6 km h e 2nd 2 5 mph 4 km h 3rd 4 mph 6 km h e 4th 5 5 mph 9 km h e 5th or D Drive 7 5 mph 12 km h e REVERSE 1 mph 1 6 km h e NEUTRAL 2 5 mph 4 km h e PARK HDC will not function HDC is intended for low speed off road driv ing only At vehicle speeds above 20 mph 32 km h HDC will no longer function When the vehicle speed drops below 20 mph 32 km h HDC function will automatically re sume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set speed WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for main taining a safe vehicle speed ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the igni ee tion switch is turned to the ON position It should turn off with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC System If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers
301. on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automati cally and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regu larly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS con sists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings When one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low the TPM Telltale Light will illuminate an audible chime will sou
302. on of a phone call on the Uconnect M Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality available on the ve hicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until a vehicle Specific time expires or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect M Phone for a certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the we button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Dutch French Deutsch Italian or Spanish if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is
303. on switch does not have to be in the ON position e Pressing the power folding mirror switch for more than four seconds or if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h will disable the folding feature If the mirrors are in the folded position and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 5 mph 8 km h they will automatically unfold The mirrors must be fully open or closed for this feature to operate properly and must be manually opened or closed if necessary Illuminated Vanity Mirrors To access an illuminated vanity mirror flip down one of the sun visors Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will turn on automatically 030409524 Illuminated Vanity Mirror BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect Highway licens able vehicles automobiles trucks motor cycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle 030405533 Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m
304. onic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Service Tire Pressure System Service Park Assist System e Park Assist System Blinded e Park Assist Disabled e Front Sensor Blinded e Rear Sensor Blinded e Keyfob Battery Low e Liftglass Open e Left front turn signal lamp out e Right front turn signal lamp out e Left rear turn signal lamp out e Right rear turn signal lamp out e Check Tire Pressure e ESC System Off e Service blind spot system ind spot detection unavailable ind spot system off ocked ind spot system unavailable astronomy zone When the Blind Spot Module senses tower on the same frequency that it is erfering with it will automatically turn the Blind Spot System off B B Blind spot system unavailable sensor b B n a Normal Cruise Ready When Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system is turned off and Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode is available Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle if equipped Adaptive Cruise Off When the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system is turned off Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Ve hicle if equipped ACC Ready When the ACC system is activated Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if eq
305. ontrol 226 Jacking Instructions 256 Gasoline Clean Air 238 Hill Descent Control Indicator 159 Jump Starting 258 Gauges Hill Start Assist 224 Coolant Temperature 163 Holder Cup o 144 Key In Reminder 14 Eel mena ari ent dtes Ro ets 162 Hood Release 108 Key Programming 15 Speedometer 162 Key Replacement 15 Tachometer 158 gniion 13 Key Sentry Immobilizer 14 Gear Ranges AO e a a 203 A wb ahs 12 13 Keyless Ente N Go 21 174 198 Gear Select Lever Override 261 gnition Key Removal 13 Keyless Entry System 17 General Information 15 19 lluminated Entry 17 Keyless GO 12 174 Glass 288 mmobilizer Sentry Key 14 d NP Wea 12 Gross Axle Weight Rating 242 nfant Restraint 47 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 241 nflation Pressure Tires 228 ap Shoulder Belts 29 nformation Center Vehicle 163 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for Hands Free Phone uconnect 72 nside Rearview Mirror 65 Children esr 49 Hazard Warning Flasher 254 nstrument Cluster 158 Latones e e a 55 Head Restraints 97 nstrum
306. onverter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system SS determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indica tor will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the mes sage will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed perfor mance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufactur er s warranty MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engi neers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future 271 CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when neces sar
307. op At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an asso ciated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 1 To open the hood pull the release lever located below the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle 031335093 Hood Release Lever 103 2 Then reach under the hood and pull upward on the safety latch and lift the hood 031305631 Safety Latch Location WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warn ing could result in serious injury or death CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage 104 LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
308. or are no longer met during the four second timer then the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be op erable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL N position indica tor light indicates that shift requirements have not been met Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it connected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Reconnect the negative battery cable 4 Turn the key fob to the LOCK OFF position if it has been moved or the engine has been started 5 Turn the key fob to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 6 Press and hold the brake pedal 7 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 8 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object press and hold the recessed transfer case N Neutral button located by the selector Switch for four seconds until the light behind the N symbol starts to blink indicating shift in progress The light will stop blinking go out when shift is complete The FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will
309. orage Compartment CARGO AREA FEATURES Rechargeable Flashlight The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of the cargo area The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place Press in on the flashlight to release it 146 e a Wi p y a y HS 5 Press And Release To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high twice for low and a third time to return to off 035410217 Three Press Switch Cargo Storage Bins There are four removable storage bins located in the rear cargo area There are two storage bins located on either side of the cargo area I 4 MAN A Rear Storage Bins Two additional storage bins are located under the load floor To access the lower storage bins raise the load floor and attach the tether hook attached to the bottom of the load floor to the liftgate opening Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo To cover the cargo area m 1 Grasp the cover at the center handle Pull it Tether Strap over the cargo area Rear Cargo Cover 2 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim co
310. oss your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug Continued 31 WARNING Continued A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Removing Slack from Belt 32 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disas semble or modify the system Seat belt as semblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing
311. ote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal Refer to Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the emergency
312. output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after a maximum of 55 minutes of continuous opera tion At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passen ger seats are ventilated Located in the sea cushion and seatback are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and blow air through fine perforations in the sea cover to help keep the driver and front passen ger cooler in higher ambient temperatures There are two ventilated seat switches tha allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The ventilated sea Switches are located on the switch bank in the center stack of the instrument panel just below the climate controls The ventilated seat switches are used to control the speed of the fans located in the seat Press the switch once to choose HIGH press it a second time to choose LOW Pressing the switch a third time 030905581 will turn the ventilated seat OFF When HIGH Speed is selected both lights on the switch will be illuminated When LOW speed is selected one light will be illuminated NOTE The engine must be running for the venti lated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped with Remo
313. ova 2296 2 149 45 Praha 4 Chodov Czech Republic Tel 420 0 2 71077 111 Tel 420 0 2 25101 111 Fax 420 0 2 71077 507 DENMARK Chrysler Danmark ApS Frederikskaj 4 DK 1790 K benhavn V Tel 45 0 35 256 830 Fax 445 0 35 256 832 307 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Reid y Compa ia John F Kennedy Casi Esq Lope de Vega Santo Domingo Dominican Republic Tel 809 562 7211 Fax 809 565 8774 ECUADOR Chrysler Jeep Automotriz del Ecuador Av Juan Tanca Marengo km 4 5 Guayaquil Ecuador Tel 593 4 225 7935 Fax 593 4 224 7787 EL SALVADOR Grupo Q del Salvador Blvd Los Pr ceres y Avenida No 1 Lomas de San Francisco San Salvador El Salvador Tel 503 22730988 Fax 503 278 5731 308 ESTONIA Silberauto AS J rvevana tee 11 11314 Tallinn Tel 06 266 098 Tel 06 266 050 Fax 06 266 066 FINLAND Chrysler FinlandOy Ristipellontie 5 00390 HELSINKI Tel 020 54771 Fax 020 5477 485 FRANCE Chrysler France Parc de Rocquencourt BP100 F 78153 Le Chesnay Cedex Tel 33 1 39 23 56 00 Fax 33 1 39 23 57 92 GERMANY Chrysler Deutschland GmbH Englische StraBe 30 D 10587 Berlin Telefon 49 0 30 2690 0 Telefax 49 0 30 2690 3999 GRAND DUCHY OF LUXEMBOURG NT MAILFAS C O Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg BRU BRU 37850 Antwoord Nummer 193032 1930 Zaventem Belgium Tel 0800 6661 Fax 32 02 717 33 GREECE Chrysler Jeep Dodge Hellas 240 242 Kifisias Avenue 15231 Halandri Athen
314. ove to the middle position be fore the sunroof begins Express Open opera tion Venting Sunroof Express Press the center Vent button on the sunroof Switch for less than one second and release and the sunroof glass will automatically vent fully open from any position then stop This is called Express Vent During Express Vent operation any sunroof switch press or shade Switch press will stop the sunroof If the shade is closed when the vent switch is pressed the shade will automatically move to the middle position before the sunroof begins Express Vent operation Closing Sunroof Express Press the sunroof switch forward for less than one second and release and the sunroof glass will automatically close from any position then stop This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the sun roof Opening Power Shade Express Press the shade switch rearward for less than one second and release and the shade will automatically open then stop This is called Express Shade Open If the shade is forward of the middle position it will move to the middle position then stop If the shade is at or rearward of the middle position it will move to the full open position then stop During Express Shade Open operation any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the shade Closing Power Shade Express Press the shade switch forward for
315. owing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed show ing the system has been deactivated For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Display Units of Measure In The EVIC odometer and Uconnect gps if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the SELECT but ton until ENGLISH or METRIC appears Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more informa tion Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more informa tion SOUND SYSTEMS Refer to your Sound Systems Booklet iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with Uconnect For sales code RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 touch screen radio iPod USB MP3 control feature refer to the separate RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 User s Manual iPod USB MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port lo cated in the center console or glove compart ment iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the
316. p Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear 3 6L and 3 0L Diesel engine or in direct gear 5 7L engine until the vehicle is brought to a stop To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever into the PARK position 3 Turn the engine off and be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the engine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the trans mission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEU TRAL will continue to operate Only second gear 3 6L and 3 0L Diesel engine or third gear 5 7L engine will be available in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmis Sion on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a cali brated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a cali brated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages NOTE e The torque converter clutch may
317. p to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off turn the headlight Switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic Mode Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensi tive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within ap proximately one minute and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers and Washers in this section for further informa tion NOTE When your headlights come on during the daytime the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity Refer to Lights in this section for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital cam era mounted on the
318. pproximate grade or greater hill e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direc tion i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 896 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is respon sible for braking the vehicle Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming accel eration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putti
319. preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph 5 km h the transfer case will not allow the shift NEUTRAL Shift Procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine off 2 Vehicle stopped with foot on brake 3 Place the transmission into NEUTRAL 4 Hold down the NEUTRAL pin switch with a pen etc for four seconds until the LED light by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress The light will stop blinking stay on 210 solid when the NEUTRAL shift is complete A To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Pro cedure in Owners Manual message will dis play on the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 051810686 Neutral Switch 5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met a Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners Manual message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Quadra Drive Il System If Equipped The optional Quadra Drive System features two torque transfer couplings The couplings include an Electronic Limi
320. pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following compo nents e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 233 A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate a warn ing message to appear or the chime to sound The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will display in the instrument cluster for 5 seconds and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected In addi tion a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message may be displayed for approximately 5 seconds when a system fault is detected and a chime 234 will sound If the ignition switch is cycled thi
321. r airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios DOOR LOCKS The power door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob If the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door t 021835081 Manual Door Lock Knob 19 WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an un locked vehicle Unsupervised use of ve hicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries or death Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is located on each ront door panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors 20 021835082 Power Door Lock Switch f the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door f you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and the driver s door is open the doors will not lock f a rear door is locked it cannot be opened rom inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door The door may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob Automatic
322. r all off road driving until OR2 is needed A smoother and more comfortable ride will result Press the Up button once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 48 mph 77 km h When in the OR1 position if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph 64 km h and 50 mph 80 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph 80 km h the vehicle will be auto matically lowered to NRH Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Operating for further information Off Road 2 OR2 Raises the vehicle ap proximately 2 6 in 65 mm 2 2 in 66mm w AMS package This position is intended for off roading use only where maximum ground clearance is required To enter OR2 press the Up button twice from the NRH position or once from the OR1 position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph 32 km h While in OR2 if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to OR1 Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Operat ing for further information Aero Mode Lowers the vehicle approxi mately 0 5 in 13 mm This position pro vides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph 100 km h and 66 mph 106 km h for greater than 20 sec onds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph 106 km h The vehicle will return to NRH from Aer
323. r exceeds the temperature range of your cli mate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer Solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main tained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the under side or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or misposi tioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 277 WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you uncon Scious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Do Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will de stroy the effectivene
324. raction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Electronic Stability Control ESC All five of these systems work together to enhance ve icle stability and control in various driving conditions gt zy Also your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control TSC Hill Start Assist HSA Brake Lock Differential BLD Ready Alert Braking Rain Brake Support and if it has four wheel drive with the MP 3023 two speed transfer case Hill Descent Control HDC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining ve hicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skid ding on slippery surfaces during braking WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent ac cidents including those resulting from exces sive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be ex ploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s
325. rades ERS 1 2 and 3 are underdrive gears ERS 4 is direct drive ERS 5 Overdrive is the same as the normal 4th gear When in the DRIVE position in first through fourth gear the first tap to the left will display the ERS designation for the current gear the transmission will not downshift For example if you are in DRIVE and are in third direct gear when you tap the shift lever one time to the left the display will show 4 ERS 4 is direct gear Another tap to the left will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 the added under drive gear When in the DRIVE position in fifth gear the first tap to the left will downshift the transmission and display 5 ERS 5 is the same as normal fourth gear Another tap to the left will shift the transmission down to ERS 4 direct gear WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen Dis 1 2 3 4 5 Actual 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 5 Gear s Al lowed Applies to vehicles equipped with 5 7L engines only NOTE To select the proper gear position for maxi mum deceleration engine braking move the shift lever to the left D and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Overdrive Operation The automatic transmissio
326. ransmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 020207435 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the un lock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Refer to Keyless Enter N Go If Equipped under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion 17 Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Turn Headlights On With Rem
327. re adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the trans mission may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid Level Check 5 7L Engine Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature This occurs af ter at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips To check the fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and nor mal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position ending with the shift lever in PARK 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating tempera ture The fluid level is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission
328. re selected This al lows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode 045633350 The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following posi tions Panel Mode 7 Air comes from the outlets in the instru ment panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets Bi Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel Dd outlets floor outlets and defrost outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the Bl LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode e Air comes from the floor outlets A slight x amount of air is directed through the de frost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode de Air comes from the floor defrost and Dd Side window demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature set tings for best windshield and side window defrosting When the defrost mode i
329. re that itis properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at Zero When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC messages Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center 159 11 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufac turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pres sure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability 160 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tir
330. reached then press the SELECT but ton 3 Press the DOWN button until the Compass Variance message is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button The last vari ance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected accord ing to the map 5 Press and release the RETURN button to exit Customer Programmable Features System Setup Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving a warning message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE is followed in three seconds by VEHICLE NOT IN PARK Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup displays in the EVIC Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the following choices Select Language When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature includ ing the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll through the language choices Press the SELECT button to select English Spanish Espafol French Francais Italian Italiano German Deutsch and Dutch Nederlands Then as you con tinue the information will display in the se lected language Nav Turn By Turn When this feature is selected the navigation System utilizes voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by m
331. rear surround ings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disap pear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approxi mate distances for each zone Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red O 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30 cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater 136 WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious
332. rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent posi tions full forward full rearward and normal Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated when ever you turn on the rear window de froster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information 66 Power Outside Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver side door trim panel The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four way mirror control Switch To adjust a mirror press the mirror select button for the mirror that you want to adjust Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move 030435087 Power Mirror Switch 1 Mirror Direction Control 2 Mirror Selection Power mirror preselected positions can be con trolled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understand ing the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped To fold the mirrors press the power folding mirror switch located between the power mir ror select buttons Press the switch once to fold the mirrors press the switch a second time to return the mirrors to unfold the mirrors NOTE e Both mirrors will always move together and will fold anytime the knob is turned The igniti
333. ress the AVR button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the we button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones e Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts R button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the Uconnect Phone features press the we button and say Uconnect Tutorial You can also press the c jV Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the Uconnect Phone recognizing the
334. ress the drivers door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 The system will recall any stored settings Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s sideview mirror to the desired positions 4 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set 101 5 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 6 Press and release the SET S button lo cated on the driver s door 7 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be performed within five sec onds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 8 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 9 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition Switch to the ON position 10 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes or select Use Factory Settings from the EVIC and enter Yes Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information 102 11 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another RKE transmit ter t
335. ries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occu 97 pant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint 030907490 Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head 98 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position us Active Head Restraint Tilted 030907533 NOTE e The head restraints should only be re moved by qualified technicians for ser vice purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your au thorized dealer e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Re straints AHR in Things to Know Be fore Starting Your Vehicle for further in formation WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a colli
336. ring column is locked before driving your vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one tem perature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before auto matically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch bank below the climate controls 113 Press the switch to turn on the heated steering wheel The light on the switch will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated steering wheel and light indicator 031705825 NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel and seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 114 WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medi cation a
337. river mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT but ton until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the System has been deactivated NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmit ter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Tilt Mirror in Reverse When this feature is selected the outside rear view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition Switch is in the RUN position and the transmis Sion shift lever is in the REVERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of RE VERSE To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is re moved showing the system has been deacti vated Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power win dow switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection scroll
338. road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo atthe phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system perfor mance may be compromised with the con vertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Download Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incoming and Missed Calls SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new mes sages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages e Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Press the we button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Messages e You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are
339. rom storage 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools 060533361 Jack and Tool Assembly CAUTION Do not attempt to raise vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 4 For a front tire place the jack and protective cap on the flange just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 060637589 Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding 060533362 Front Jacking Location 5 For a rear tire place the jack and protective cap in the slot on the rear tie down bracket just forward of the rear tire as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged y 060637590 Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding 060533363 Rear Jacking Location 6 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise Raise the vehicle only until the tire 257 just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire ift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt som
340. rowse and List the iPod contents e The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if sup ported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either press the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system 182 Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device auto matically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press VR button and say Next Track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press VR button and say Previous Track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump forward in the current track by press ing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward R
341. rs 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Pas sive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driv er s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touch ing the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter RKE Linked To Memory When this feature is selected you can use your RKE transmitter to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets When OFF is selected only the MEMORY switch on the driver s door trim panel 178 will recall memory profiles To make your selec tion press and release the SELECT button a check mark appears next to the feature show ing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Flash Lamps With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make
342. s Greece Tel 30 210 6700800 Fax 30 210 6700820 GUATEMALA Grupo Q del Guatemala Edificio Grupo Q calle Mariscal Cruz 9 04 Zona 4 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala Tel 4502 6685 9500 HONDURAS Grupo Q de Honduras Blvd Centro Am rica frente a Plaza Miraflores Tegucigalpa Honduras Tel 504 235 9220 Fax 504 232 6564 HUNGARY Chrysler Automotive Hungaria Kft H 1133 Budapest K rp t u 21 Tel 36 1 887 7000 Fax 36 1 887 7098 IRELAND C J IRELAND CONCESSIONAIRES LIMITED Clonlara Avenue Baldonnell Business Park Baldonnell Dublin 22 Ireland Tel 1890 946866 ITALY Chrysler Italia S r l Via Giulio Vincenzo Bona 110 00156 Roma Tel 06 41442812 Fax 06 418823114 E mail talktoGchrysler com LATVIA TC MOTORS LTD 40 Krasta Str LV 1003 Riga Tel 07 812 312 FAX 07 812 313 LITHUANIA Silberauto AS Laisves av 125 A LT 2022 VILNIUS Tel 02 301037 Fax 02 301036 NETHERLANDS Chrysler Nederland B V Postbus 2088 NL 3500 GB Utrecht Tel 31 0 30 247 19 11 Fax 31 0 30 247 16 00 NEW ZEALAND Chrysler New Zealand Private Bag 14907 Panmure New Zealand Tel 09573 7800 Fax 09573 7808 NORWAY Chrysler Norge A S Solheimveien 7 N 1471 L renskog Tel 47 67 92 60 00 Fax 47 67 90 53 10 PANAMA Grupo Q de Panam Calle 50 Final Edificio 68 San Francisco Panam Panam Tel 507 303 1100 Fax 507 303 0980 PARAGUAY Cencar S A Av
343. s Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Supplemen tal Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB Supple mental Driver Side Knee Airbag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag are designed to pro vide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions de pending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions 42 The Advanced Front Airbags and Supplemen tal Driver Side Knee Airbag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may pro duce substantial vehicle damage for ex ample some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle de celeration over time vehicle speed and dam age by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have de ployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all accidents and also are needed to help keep you in pos
344. s sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condi tion no longer exists A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driv ing next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will be displayed in the instrument cluster and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes sage will be displayed For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will flash
345. s will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Uconnect Phonebook Names e Press the we button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phonebook entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the c VR button during the playing of the de sired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or De lete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to Call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect M Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have 77 Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the button to accept the call To reject the cal
346. s engine oil improves low temperature start ing and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom mended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 273 Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils Do not add supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your local authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every oil change 274 Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturers engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality
347. s re appears Compass Temperature Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing The EVIC will display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature NOTE The system will display the last known out side temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is dis played Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore tem perature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which elimi nates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges under ground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn ON the ignition switch 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup C
348. s selected the blower will automatically default to medium high unless the blower is controlled manually NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the wind shield Defrost mode must be manually se lected to clear the windshield and side glass Air Conditioning A C The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in A C mode and the ATC is set to a cool temperature dehumidi fied air flows through the air outlets If Economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE e f the system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and in crease blower speed Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control but ton Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED 189 C will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of R
349. s should be kept under 1 200 RPM during the warm up period especially in cold ambient temperature conditions If temperatures are below 32 F 0 C operate the engine at moderate speeds for five minutes before full loads are applied Engine Idling In Cold Weather Avoid prolonged idling in ambient tempera tures below O F 18 C Long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine because com bustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely Incom plete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles Also the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine Stopping The Engine Before turning off your turbo diesel engine always allow the engine to return to normal idle Speed and run for several seconds This as sures proper lubrication of the turbocharger This is particularly necessary after any period of hard driving Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown After full load operation idle the engine three to five minutes before shutting it down This idle period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from the combustion chamber bearings internal components and turbocharger This is espe cially important for turbocharged charge air cooled engines AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions
350. s to be op erable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL N position indica tor light indicates that shift requirements have not been met HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis tance the Hazard Warning flashers will con tinue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery 254 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action e On the highways slow down e n city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not in crease the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impendi
351. sher 254 JACKING s EC 255 Jump Starting 258 Engine Air 274 Break In Recommendations 53 Compartment 268 269 270 Compartment Identification 268 269 270 COMING 2 2 6 279 Exhaust Gas Caution 28 54 Fails to Start sce oee ss 200 Flooded Starting 200 Fuel Requirements 237 296 Jump Starting 258 Multi Displacement 220 ar Sect eno Sen he Goethe 272 296 Oil Change Interval 272 Oil Disposal sss 274 OI FIG o prece ee 274 Oil Selection 272 273 296 Oil Synthetic 274 Overheating 254 Sc lt lt 12s Ap Rom d gn 198 Temperature Gauge 163 Engine Oil Viscosity 273 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 273 318 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 44 Entry System Illuminated 17 Ethanol amp zu xoxo Rs 238 Event Data Recorder 46 Exhaust Gas Caution 28 54 278 Exhaust System 54 277 Exterior Finish Care 286 Exterior Lights sss et 55 Filters Air 274 Engine Oll ica dos 274 Finish Care ita as Be 286 Fl sherS ioo woe ER x x 254 Hazard Warning 254 Turn Signal 55 159 293 294 Flipper Glass Liftgate 26 Flooded Engine Starting 200
352. sion and could result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued e Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid acci dental deployment of the Active Head Re straint ensure that all cargo is secured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is de ployed Head Restraints Rear Seats The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their normal posi tion when the rear seat is raised After returning either seat to its upright position raise the head restraint until it locks in place The outboard headrests are not removable The center head restraint has limited adjust ment Lift upward on the head restraint to raise it or push downward on the head restraint to lower it 030933142 Rear Head Restraint WARNING Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied NOTE For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Starting Your V
353. solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the follow ing manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPARe Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting nterior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use OPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Leather Seat Care And Cleaning OPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifi cally recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be remove
354. splays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your autho rized dealer Service ACC Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sen sor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACCIFCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 56789 mi 032433104 ACC FCW Unavailable Warning Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpectedly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installa tion of a trailer hitch or if the ACC performance does not return to normal after removing the trailer hitch see your authorized dealer Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line o
355. ss of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause seri ous damage to the engine Under normal operating conditions the cata ytic converter will not require maintenance However it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst opera tion and prevent possible catalyst damage 278 CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your ve hicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat result ing in possible damage to the converter and vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions con trol systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such ma terials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn n unusual situations involving grossly malfunc tioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over heating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool S
356. ssemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle To deactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Sensors Then drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 24 km h 15 mph The TPMS will chime the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message and then display dashes in place of the pressure values Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle the TPMS will no longer chime or display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message in the EVIC but dashes will remain in place of the pressure values To reactivate the TPMS replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with tires equipped with TPM sensors Then drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 24 km h 15 mph The TPMS will chime the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 sec onds and then turn off and the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message The EVIC will display pressure values in place of the dashes On the next ignition switch cycle the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no lon ger be displayed as long as no system fault exists FUEL REQUIREMENTS GASOLINE ENGINE 3 6L Engine These engines are designed to
357. st state and federal fire regulations and may cause the mal function indicator light to turn on Afire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tight ened e If the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refu eled Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the left rear storage bin cover 3 Pull the release cable Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system p determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indica tor will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the mes sage will appear the next time the vehicle is started TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and in
358. such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints 3 e The infant carrier is only used rearward Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled ined child facing in the vehicle It is recommended for up at all times including babies and children ma co en n Testis cse Ps vera children who weigh up to about 9 kg 20 lbs tiny baby can become a projectile inside Convertible child seats often have a higher the vehicle The force required to hold even weight limit in the rearward facing direction an infant on your lap can become so great than infant carriers do so they can be used that you could not hold the child no matter rearward facing by children who weigh more how strong you are The child and others than 9 kg 20 lbs but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the NUM ISOFIX child restraint anchorage system for the child s size Refer to ISOFIX Child Seat Anchorage System could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint 81057108 Infants And Child Restraints There are different sizes and types of restraints or children from newborn size to the child WARNING WARNING almost large enough for an adult safety belt Rearward facing child seats must never be Exirome Ha
359. sunroof or shade press the corresponding switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal motion ends After two seconds all closing motions will be manual and will have Pinch Protect dis abled This will allow the sunroof or shade to move towards the closed position 141 Method 2 If three consecutive sunroof or shade close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Pinch Protect Override Cancellation Once the sunroof or shade reaches the closed position Pinch Protect will reactivate In addi tion if any other switch is pressed which moves the sunroof or shade away from the closed position Pinch Protect will reactivate Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the per ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffet ing If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 142 Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof swit
360. t To Start Light goes out the engine is ready to start 4 Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key FOBIK to briefly turn the igni tion switch to the START position and then release it The starter motor will continue to run and it will automatically disengage when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 20 sec onds The starter can be disengaged by turn ing the ignition switch to the OFF position if required 5 After the engine starts allow it to idle for approximately 30 seconds before driving This allows oil to circulate and lubricate the turbo charger Avoid prolonged idling in ambient tempera tures below O F 18 C Long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine because com bustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely Incom plete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles Also 202 the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine Engine Warm Up Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold When starting a cold engine bring the engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up NOTE High speed no load running of a cold en gine can result in excessive white smoke and poor engine performance No load en gine speed
361. t of the engine compartment This is normally a re sult of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will Soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recov ery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing 281 If frequent engine coolant antifreeze addi tions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concen tration at 50 HOAT engine coolant anti freeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or ob structed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever nec essary install ONLY the correct type
362. t the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are avail able in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a de tected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
363. tails The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the front seats Lowering the Display Screen Remote Control Location 8161d54e STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Press ing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the
364. te Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the ve hicle or occupying a seat Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable components and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head re straint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of inju
365. ted Slip Differential ELSD rear axle and the Quadra Trac 119 trans fer case The optional ELSD axle is fully auto matic and requires no driver input to operate Under normal driving conditions the unit func tions as a standard axle balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels With a traction difference between left and right wheels the coupling will sense a speed differ ence As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less traction to the wheel that has traction While the transfer case and axle coupling differ in design their operation is similar Follow the Quadra Trac 11 transfer case shifting information preceding this section for shifting this system SELEC TERRAIN IF EQUIPPED Description Selec Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems along with driver input to provide the best performance for all terrains 051810689 Selec Terrain Switch Selec Terrain consists of the following posi tions e Sport Dry weather on road calibration Only available in 4WD High range Perfor mance based tuning that provides a rear wheel drive feel but with improved handling and acceleration over a two wheel drive ve hicle The Electronic Stability Control will set to allow more driver control of vehicle while maintaining safe handling controls The ve hicle will lower if equipped with Air
366. ted inside the storage area on the center stack of the instru ment panel Push inward on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain access to this power outlet 072736476 Front Power Outlet Center Console Outlet Power Outlet Fuse Locations In addition to the front power outlet there is The rear power outlet is located in the right rear 1 M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel also a power outlet located in the storage area cargo area 2 M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instru of the center console ment Panel 3 M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Con sole Bin Q WARNING To avoid serious injury or death M gt e Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt PN outlet 034609793 Do not touch with wet hands Rear Power Outlet Continued 143 WARNING Continued e Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e f this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc
367. ted tires are dangerous and can cause accidents e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure e Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure Continued 228 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle e Over inflated or under inflated tires can af fect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended pressure Economy mproper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire roling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and un comfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire in
368. tem consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition Switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further informa tion Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operat ing positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are LOCK ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automatically returns to the detented ON RUN position NOTE With the Keyless Enter N Go feature the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in th
369. tem requires that the engine be running for all changes When lowering the vehicle all of the doors including the liftgate must be closed If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door s is closed The Quadra Lift air suspension system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncom ing traffic When raising the vehicle the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front When lowering the vehicle the front will move down first and then the rear After the engine is turned off it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly this is normal The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance To assist with changing a spare tire the Quadra Lift air suspension system has a fea ture which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled Press and hold both the Up and Down buttons simultaneously between 5 and 10 seconds a message will appear in the EVIC stating leveling has been disabled immediately after both buttons have been released Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Driving the vehicle over 5 mph 8 km h will return the air suspension to normal operation Refer to Jacking and Tire Changing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 213
370. ter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and re place the bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Fog Lamps 1 Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connector 2 Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the front fog lamp housing 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fin gers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Continued 293 CAUTION Continued e Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp the socket or the lamp wiring 4 Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of the front fog lamp housing 5 Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar 6 Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are fully engaged
371. tes and folds out of the way allowing the airbag to inflate to the full size The airbag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Airbag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of airbag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This espe cially applies to children Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags de 43 pending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is gener
372. th temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature de creases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire pressure Once the TPM Telltale is illuminated and the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message appears the tire pressure must be increased to the recom mended cold tire pressure in order for the TPM Telltale and the TIRE LOW PRESSURE mes sage to be turned off The system will automati cally update and the TPM Telltale and the TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will turn off once the updated tire pressures have b
373. thanol blended fuels due to the lower energy content of Ethanol Problems that result from using Methanol gasoline or E 85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol CAUTION Use of fuel with Ethanol content higher than 10 may result in engine malfunction starting and operating difficulties and materials degra dation These adverse effects could result in permanent damage to your vehicle Clean Air Gasoline any gasolines are now being blended that contribute to cleaner air especially in those areas where air pollution levels are high These new blends provide a cleaner burning fuel and some are referred to as reformulated gaso line The manufacturer supports these efforts toward cleaner air You can help by using these blends as they become available MMT in Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic addi tive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufac turer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whet
374. that the request has been recognized and will lower to Entry Exit height when vehicle is below 15 mph Service Air Suspension System This is displayed when a fault has occurred in the system The system will have limited opera tion at that point Immediate Air Suspension Service Repair Required This is displayed when a fault has occurred in the system which results in a complete system shutdown The system will be non operational at that point Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height This message is displayed in ad vance warning to the driver that the vehicle will be moved to the next lower preset posi tion unless the speed is reduced Selected Ride Height Not Permitted The vehicle speed is too high to enter one of the preset levels Entry Exit Level Off Road Ride Height Level 1 Off Road Ride Height Level 2 Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait This message is displayed if the compressor temperature level is too high Level control is suspended until the compressor has cooled down Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open This message is displayed if a door or the liftgate is ajar and level control is sus pended Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And Tire Change Aerodynamic Ride Height This is dis played for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Aerodynamic Height EVIC White Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable white cau tion tellt
375. the ERS function on the transmission shifter is recommended 5 7L Models Only Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you expe rience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily 247 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift must be owered to the Park lowest level and have automatic leveling disabled before tying them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting and Operating for more information If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the Park level for example engine will not run tie downs must be fastened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may 248 Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground Four Wheel Drive Models See Instructions Flat Tow NONE e Transmission in PARK e Transf
376. the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assem bly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occu pant s chest WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly auto matic locking retractor feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating posi tions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional informa tion refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Re straints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Passen Center Driver ger First Row ALR N A N A Second ALR ALR ALR Row Third Row N A N A N A N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor f the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid 33 section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you wi
377. the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the ve hicle and have an accident Trailer Tongue Weight TW The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be more than 1096 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multi plied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Weight See Note 1 with Trailer Brake without Trailer Brake 3 6L Gasoline 5 000 lbs 2 268 kg 1 653 Ibs 750 kg 500 Ibs 227 kg 5 7L Gasoline 7 716 lbs 3 500 kg 1 653 lbs 750 kg 500 to 772 lbs 227 to 350 kg See Note 1 3 0L Diesel 7 716 lbs 3 500 kg 1 653 lbs 750 kg 500 to 772 lbs 227 to 350 kg See Note 1 Maximum trailer towing speed is limited to 62 mph 100 km h unless local laws require a lower speed Towing figures applicable when fitted with a Note 1 Trai genuine MOPAR towbar by an authorized
378. the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position 94 Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dan gerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seatbelt e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or pas senger seats are also equipped with power umbar The power lumbar switch is located on the o
379. thermo stat Other designs may result in unsatisfac tory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions 282 Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be peri odically inspected Refer to the Service and Warranty Handbook for the proper mainte nance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood ser vice or immediately if the brake system warn ing lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and a MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap With disc brakes the fluid level can be ex pected to fall as the brake linings wear How ever an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information WARNI
380. thin 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the driver s front door handle to unlock the drivers door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked 22 Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is pro grammed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver s front door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passen ger door handle is grabbed regardless of the drivers door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock fea ture which will function if there is no Key Fob present in the ignition
381. tion normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is 223 required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation 054810680 ESC OFF Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driv ing with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by 224 momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 4WD Low Range Partial Off This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range the ESC system will be in the Partial Off mode Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an exces sively swaying trailer is recognized No
382. to either memory position repeat Steps 1 5 for each RKE transmitter NOTE Once programmed all RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle There are two possible Easy Exit and Easy Entry adjustments available e The seat cushion will move rearward ap proximately 2 in 60 mm if the starting position of the seat is greater than or equal to 2 5 in 68 mm forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition Switch The seat will then move forward approximately 2 in 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position e The seat shall move to the position located 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 1 in to 2 5 in 23 to 68 mm forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward to the memory driving position when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position toward the RUN position The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature will be auto matically disabled if the seat is already posi tioned closer than 1 in 23 mm forward of the rear st
383. to sound an audible chime alert and reduce the radio volume to notify the driver of objects that have entered the detection zones Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is neces sary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle Side Monitoring Entering From The Rear Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage berms etc However oc casionally the system may alert on such ob jects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Rear Monitoring Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate Stationary Objects 030405538 Overtaking Passing 69 The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are tra
384. to the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious per sonal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emer gencies for further information Clearing a Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have fol lowed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 sec onds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engine fails to start after you have fol lowed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold
385. traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from ex cessive speed in turns driving on very slip pery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabili ties of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for whee ift by monitoring the drivers steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ER determines that the rate of change of the steer ing wheel angle and vehicle speed are suffi cient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving ma neuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve hicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road conditions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve hicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped
386. uality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle it can go places and perform tasks for which conven tional two wheel drive vehicles were not in tended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual and all the Supplements Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering and transmission and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience but as in driving any vehicle take it easy as you begin When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload it or expect it to overcome the forces of nature Always observe local laws wherever you drive 4 As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Be sure to read the On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for conve nient referencing and remain with the ve hicle when sold Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or while intoxicated may result
387. ue to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in personal injury or property dam age Follow the roof rack cautions when car rying cargo on your roof rack Continued 151 152 154 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Radio 4 Glove Compartment D 040135080 5 Climate Controls 9 Fuel Door Release 6 Lower Switch Bank 10 Headlight Switch 7 Storage Bin 11 Hood Release 8 Ignition Switch 156 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Trip A 335 5 mi Vehicle Info 335 mi 20 9 8 un 157 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 2 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to o eight seconds as a bulb check ry when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Be fore Starting Your Vehicle for further in
388. uipped ACC Set After setting the desired speed in the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Cancelled To disable the ACC sys tem Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Sensed Vehicle Indicator The system de tects a slower moving vehicle in the same lane Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped e Driver Override If you apply the accelera tor after setting the desired speed in the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Distance Set After changing the desired following distance in the ACC system this message will display momentarily Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped e Brake If the ACC system predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance this message will flash and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking ca pacity When this occurs you should imme diately apply the brakes as needed to main tain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Ve hicle if equipped
389. until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driv ing Adjusting the steering column while driv ing or driving with the steering column un locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering col umn upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column 031809534 Power Tilt Telescoping Steering To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for further information WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driv ing Adjusting the steering column while driv ing or driving with the steering column un locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the stee
390. up or e Switch to setup In this mode you may say the following com mands e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Language Dutch e Language Deutsch 92 e Language ltalian e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the sys tem recognizing their voice commands or num bers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect M Voice For best re sults the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e t is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that
391. ure condition in the power steering sys tem You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condi tion no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle After five minutes the system will cool and 168 return to normal operation Refer to Power Steering in Starting and Operating for further information NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low ve hicle speeds and during parking maneu vers If the condition persists see your autho rized dealer for service EVIC Amber Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable amber cau tion telltales These telltales include e Forward Collision Warning FCW OFF This light warns the driver of a FCW potential collision with the vehicle OFF in front of you and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision For further in formation refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Wait To Start Light Diesel Only This light will illuminate when the igni tion switch is first turned to the RUN position Wait until the light turns off before starting the vehicle Refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating e Water In Fuel Indicator Diesel Only
392. using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines that have these additives may help improve fuel economy reduce emissions and maintain ve hicle performance Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and stumble If you experience these problems try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Methanol Methyl or Wood Alcoho concentrations when b gasoline You may find more Methanol along wi cosolvents Problems is used in a variety of lended with unleaded fuels containing 3 or h other alcohols called hat result from using Methanol gasoline or E 85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the nega 238 ive effects of Methanol CAUTION Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E 85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Ethanol The manufacturer recommends that your ve hicle be operated on fuel containing no more than 10 Ethanol Purchasing your fuel from a reputable supplier may reduce the risk of ex ceeding this 1096 limit and or of receiving fuel with abnormal properties It should also be noted that an increase in fuel consumption should be expected when using E
393. ustomer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT but ton 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic ob jects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate com pass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detec tors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 175 176 12 col UA d Compass Variance Map 80bbc346 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is
394. utboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Push the switch rearward to decrease the lum bar support Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support 5 tt Power Lumbar Switch Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Front Passenger Seat Fold Flat Feature If Equipped To fold the seatback to the flat load floor posi tion lift the recline lever and push the seatback forward To return to the seating position raise the seatback and lock it into place Fold Flat Passenger Seat Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medi cation exhaustion or other physical condi tion must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns
395. ution wiping parallel to the heating ele ments Labels can be peeled off after soak ing with warm water e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 149 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 1 5 68 kg and should be uniformly dis tributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE If not equipped with crossbars your autho rized dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system 150 Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity To move the crossbars loosen the attach ments located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately eight turns using the anti theft wrench provided with the MOPAR crossbars Then move the crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars paral lel to the rack frame Once the crossbar is in the desired position retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into position NOTE e To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use place the front
396. veling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes Opposing Traffic 70 WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicyclists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicles mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cau tiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver I 030405522 RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations NOTE In a parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to aler
397. ver WARNING In a collision a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment Remove the cover from the vehicle when n taken from its mounting Do not store it in the LL 035409797 vehicle 3 The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in place Lower Storage Bins 147 Cargo Tie Down Hooks The cargo tie downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving v Cargo Tie Down Hooks WARNING To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Continued 148 WARNING Continued e Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or accident a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passen gers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guide lines for loading your vehicle e Do not carry loads which exceed the lo
398. ver leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position Keyless Enter N Go Functions With Driver s Foot OFF the Brake Pedal In PARK or NEUTRAL Position The Keyless Enter N Go feature operates simi lar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the 199 ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE RUN Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these tempera tures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your autho rized dealer is recommended 200 If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids in
399. viced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Front Axle Fluid Level Check The front axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill hole The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs 30 to 40 N m CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage them and cause them to leak Rear Axle Fluid Level Check The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill hole The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs 30 to 40 N m on axles with aluminum housings The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs 30 to 70 N m on axles with cast iron housings CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only the manufacturers recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 283 Transfer Case Fluid Level Check Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is found the transfer case fluid level can be checked by removing the fi
400. will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution Continued 144 CAUTION Continued e After the use of high power draw accesso ries or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the center console 035133386 Front Cupholder Location There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers located in the fold down center armrest gt 035133143 Rear Cupholders STORAGE Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the pas senger side of the instrument panel 035235096 Glove Compartment To open the glove compartment pull outward on the latch and lower the glove box door 035235098 Opened Glove Compartment Door Storage Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy access Door Panel Storage Center Console The center console contains both an upper and a lower storage area 1035209531 Storage Compartment To open the upper storage compartment pull upward on the small latch located on the lid 035209532 gt Storage Compartment Latches 145 Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the lower storage compartment Lower St
401. window If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment oc curs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Cur tains SABIC and Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat 41 Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors sig nals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbag
402. xt station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands e Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track e Previous Track to play the previous track e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the follow ing commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the Voice Command button to stop re cording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the Voice Command button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo 91 Delete to delete a memo Delete to delete all memos System Setup To switch to system setup you may say on of the following e Change to system setup e Main menu system setup e Switch to system setup e Change to setup e Main menu set
403. y Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass M 072607741 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder NO Wav 072607742 1 Wiper Blade 2 Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm 4 Wiper Blade Holder 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets o
404. y Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping cycle 031509578 Mist Control 111 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield wash ers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay posi tion 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Settings 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper Switch in the OFF position when not using the System NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position e The Rain Sensing feature may not func tion properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield 112 e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Set
405. y could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealership or qualified repair center e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunc tion use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure 272 Engine Oil Gasoline Engines Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on leve ground will improve the accuracy of the oil leve readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE leve range Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range wil result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your
406. y fob can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position Once the key fob is removed the shift lever is locked in PARK The electronically controlled transmission pro vides a precise shift schedule The transmis Sion electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a mo ment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially im portant when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to turn 203 the ignition switch to the LOCK position before restarting Transmission gear en gagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK position first PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever into the PARK position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substi tute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Continued
407. y from you Make sure that no one other than you is Speaking during a voice period Performance is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions Even though the system is designed for users speaking in European English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish accents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated sys tem such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sound ing names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local name rate is optimized when the entries are not similar 83 Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some Shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In convertible vehicle system perfor mance may be compromised with the con vertible top down Far End Audio Performance 84 Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth
408. y tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following equipment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bum 262 pers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers de frosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the vehicle s battery is discharged see Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override under Starting and Operating Automatic Transmission for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK posi tion for towing CAUTION Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing e Ifthe vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition must be in the ON RUN or ACC position not in the LOCK position Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle Four Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends towing with all
409. you buy good quality fuel and follow the cold weather advice above fuel conditioners should not be required in your vehicle If available in your area a high cetane premium diesel fuel may offer improved cold starting and warm up performance 240 ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch lo cated under the headlamp switch 056810677 Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 2 Open the fuel filler door and remove the fuel filler cap 056810679 Fuel Filler Cap CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on Continued CAUTION Continued To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is re moved or the tank is being filled e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of mo
410. you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the sys tem OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Elec tronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can increase speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually
411. your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Headlamps with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlamps Only When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT but ton until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the System has been deactivated NOTE Turning the headlights on during the day time causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance d
412. zard Do not use a rearward Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to used in the front seat of a vehicle with the facing child restraint on a seat protected by ensure you have the right seat for your child front passenger airbag unless the airbag is an airbag in front of it Refer to visor Use the restraint that is correct for your child turned off An airbag deployment could mounted labels f r intormation e Safety experts recommend that children ride cause severe injury or death to infants in Continued rearward facing in the vehicle until they are this position at least one year old and weigh at least 9 kg Continued 20 lbs Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats 47 WARNING Continued Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufac turer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stand
413. zed dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb your self If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps when the head lamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the low or high beam bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and re place the bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Turn Signal 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the turn signal bulb one quar

1 - JeepHowTo.com

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents